Electrical Specification

VOLUME-5
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
ELECTRICAL WORKS

PROPOSED AL TADAWI HOSPITAL,
AT PLOT NO 2140857, AL GARHOUD COMMUNITY/BLOCK, DUBAI

INDEX
SPECIFICATIONS

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL JULY 2014

PART B ELECTRICAL WORKS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION:

SECTION 1 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 2 : ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

SECTION 3 : STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR

SECTION 4 : LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION

SECTION 5 : VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

SECTION 6 : MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE

SECTION 7 : POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND
HARMONIC FILTERS
SECTION 8 : CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDERS AND FITTINGS

SECTION 9 : SYSTEM OF WIRING

SECTION 10 : LIGHTING

SECTION 11 : LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

SECTION 12 : LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

SECTION 13 : EARTHING

SECTION 14 : UPS SYSTEM

SECTION 15 : ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM
SECTION 16 : CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM

SECTION 17 : VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

SECTION 18 : CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM

SECTION 19 : NURSE CALL SYSTEM

SECTION 20 : CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM

SECTION 21 : PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM

SECTION 22 : ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM

SECTION 23 : MATV System
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B - SECTION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Page 1 of 25

SECTION 1


Page 2 of 25

SECTION 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS-INDEX

1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS

2.0 GENERAL

3.0 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS

4.0 PERMITS FEES AND INSPECTIONS.

5.0 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

6.0 SHOP DRAWINGS, BUILDERS WORK DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

7.0 RECORD (AS BUILT) DRAWINGS

8.0 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANAULS

9.0 TEMPORARY SERVICE.

10.0 COOPERATION

11.0 EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT

12.0 SUPERVISION.

13.0 CLEANING.

14.0 ACCESSIBILITY, ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS.

15.0 CONTRACTORS DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY

16.0 HIGH VOLTAGE NETWORK

17.0 AUTHORITIES APPROVAL.

18.0 REGULATIONS


Page 3 of 25

19.0 DEFINITIONS

20.0 PHASE IDENTIFICATION

21.0 VOLTAGE DROP

22.0 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERFERENCE

23.0 SEGREGATION OF SERVICES

24.0 BUILDER'S WORK

25.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS AND SUPPORTS

26.0 DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION

27.0 MATERIALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND WORKMANSHIP

28.0 SAMPLES

29.0 STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

30.0 PAINTING (ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT)

31.0 LABELS

32.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS - LOCAL

33.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT SITE

34.0 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE.

35.0 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION.

36.0 GUARANTEES.

37.0 MAINTENANCE

38.0 SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS

Page 4 of 25

1.0 SCOPE OF WORKS

The Scope of works includes the supply, delivery to site, installation, commissioning and
testing of the various complete systems outlined briefly below, and as described elsewhere
in the specification documents.

The contractor shall be responsible to visit the site to familiarize himself with the scope of
work and
preparation of shop drawings and obtaining approval from the various authorities prior to
execution of work. The contractor shall also be responsible for obtaining all materials and
workmanship approval during execution and on completion of works including the
connection of permanent power supply and KWH meter. All costs and charges required
by the various authorities shall be included in the scope of work except the power
connection charges which shall be paid by the client.

LV switchboards and all necessary interconnecting cabling and associated earthing
systems.

Soft starters, variable frequency drives.

Motor control centre.

Submain distribution switch gear.

Sub-main distribution cabling including all cable trays, brackets and cleats.

Final sub-circuit wiring including all necessary conduit and trunking.

All general and special purpose power accessories and switchgear.

Standby Generator.

UPS System

Light fittings, switches and all connections for lighting installations.

Lightning protection system, earthing system and harmonic protection.

Central Battery Back up Emergency lighting system

Analogue addressable Fire Alarm system.

CCTV System.

SMATV System.

Voice / Data System.

Lighting Control system.

Access Control system.


Page 5 of 25

Central Clock system.

Public Address / Background Music system.

Nurse Call System

All necessary power supplies terminating in an isolating switch located within 2 meters of
the mechanical equipment/panels.

All coordination with other subtrades to supply and install power supply to the various
equipment including all conduiting and ducts for the installation of the control wires by the
equipment supplier.

Any cost associated with removing existing services of electrical, control system and
telephone system.

1.1 The work shall comprise the whole of the labour and, unless otherwise indicated, all the
materials necessary to form a complete installation and such tests, adjustments and
commissioning as are prescribed in subsequent clauses and as may otherwise be required
to give an effective working installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.0 GENERAL

2.1 This specification is for the Mechanical and Electrical (MEP) works. However, the
Instructions to Tenderers, Form of Tender, Conditions of contract, Note on Pricing,
Preliminaries Section and any Supplementary Conditions of Contract applicable to Main
Contract shall be applicable to this contract also.

2.2 The term Contractor used in the MEP documents and drawings is to be considered to
mean the Contractor for MEP works.

2.3 Contractor shall be responsible for proper performance of all MEP systems in accordance
with relevant standards and codes and design parameters listed hereinafter.

2.4 Provide all items, articles, materials, operations, sundries, labour, supervision, guarantees,
allowances for overhead and profit, etc., to achieve a fully functionable and acceptable
system.

2.5 The precedence of documents and drawings shall be as determined in the Main Contract.
However, consider the specifications as an integral part of the work together with the
drawings. Consider any item or subject omitted from one, but mentioned or reasonably
implied on the other as properly and sufficiently indicated and provide the same under the
work of this division.

2.6 The Contractor is responsible for developing his own take off of materials and is to make
this available as requested to the Consultant.

3.0 EXAMINATION OF SITE AND DRAWINGS.


Page 6 of 25

3.1 Visit the site of the proposed works and obtain all information as to existing conditions and
limitations and all proposed works on adjacent sites and in adjacent areas which might
affect the works on this site, whether by Private Individuals or by Government Authorities or
others.

3.2 Examine the documents including the Specifications and Drawings of all other Divisions
before bidding and again before commencing any portion of the works.

3.3 Neither the Owner nor the Consultant will be responsible for any claim for extra work or
expense resulting from the failure of the Contractor to be fully aware of Site Conditions.

4.0 PERMITS FEES AND INSPECTIONS.

4.1 Arrange for inspection of all work by the Local Authorities as and where applicable. This is
to occur on an on-going basis throughout construction to avoid delays to the project. On
completion of the work, present to the Consultant, for the Owner, final unconditional
approval certificates of the Inspecting Authorities.

4.2 Pay fees/charges as levied by the Local Authorities for inspections, approvals, temporary
services, connections, etc. at no additional cost to contract.

4.3 Before commencing any work on site, submit the shop drawings (approved by the
Consultant) to the Authorities, as and where applicable, for checking and approval. Follow
the progress of such drawings to permit the timely approval of them by the Authorities.
Comply with any changes requested by the Authorities, but notify the Consultant
immediately of any such change and obtain his approval.

5.0 CONTRACT DRAWINGS

5.1 The drawings for services works are design drawings, diagrammatic, and intended to
convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement and approximate locations
of apparatus, fixtures, pipe and duct runs, etc. The drawings do not intend to indicate
architectural or structural details.
These cannot be used as shop drawings. Contractor must develop own detailed shop
drawings for work at site.

5.2 Do not scale drawings. Obtain accurate dimensions to structure and architectural items
from drawings of those trades. Confirm by site measurement. Verify location and elevation
of all services (Water, Electrical, Telephone, Sanitary, Storm Drainage, Gas, etc.,) before
proceeding with the work.

5.3 Make at no extra cost, any changes or additions to materials, and/ or equipment
necessary to accommodate structural conditions (pipes or ducts around beams, columns,
etc.)

5.4 Alter, at no additional cost, the location of materials and/ or equipment as directed,
provided that the changes are made before installation and do not necessitate additional
material.

5.5 Install all ceiling mounted components (Diffusers, grilles, detectors, light fixtures, emergency
lights, fire detectors, loudspeakers, camera points, etc.) in accordance with the reflected
ceiling drawings which are to be prepared by the Contractor and coordinated with all

Page 7 of 25

trades. These must be submitted for approval and be approved before any work
commences on site.

5.6 Leave space clear and install all work to accommodate future materials and/or
equipment as indicated and/or supplied by other divisions of work of the contract. Install
all pipe runs, conduit runs, cable trays, etc., to maintain maximum headroom and
clearances, and to conserve space in shafts and ceiling spaces and under floors, and to
provide adequate space for service and maintenance.

5.7 Confirm on the site the exact location of outlets and fixtures.

6.0 SHOP DRAWINGS, BUILDERS WORK DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

6.1 Within 15 days of award of Contract, submit programme of works. Alongwith the
programme, submit a schedule detailing proposed submission dates for all Material
Submittals, Shop drawings and Builders work drawings. Allow 15 days review period by the
Consultant for each submission.

6.2 Contractor must obtain, from the Consultant, approvals of all materials, equipment and
drawings within appropriate time to facilitate work at site, but, within 75 days latest, from
the Contract award date. This period includes any required resubmissions till final approval
is obtained.

6.3 Prepare drawings in conjunction with all trades concerned, showing sleeves and openings
for all passages through structure and all insert sizes and locations.

6.4 Prepare composite construction drawings, fully dimensioned, of piping and equipment in
tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms and areas, and all other critical locations to
avoid a conflict of trades.

Base equipment drawings upon shop drawings and include but do not necessarily limit to,
all details pertaining to access, cleanouts, tappings, sleeves, electrical connections, drains,
location and elevation of pipes, ducts, conduits, etc., obtained from consultation with, and
agreement of, all trades involved.

6.5 Prepare drawings of equipment bases, pump pits, anchors, inertia slabs, floor and roof
curbs, wall openings, trenches.

6.6 Prepare all drawings to scale as agreed with the Consultant. Generally, the scale shall be
1:50 for layouts and 1:20 for Details and Sections, etc. Forward these drawings, approved
by all trades concerned to the Consultant for his records. Provide copies in a number as
specified elsewhere in the Contract but not less than four sets.

6.7 Drawings production and presentation is a Contractual matter and any delay in making
these submissions will be considered a Contractual delay and may be subject to
Contractual penalties in accordance with Contract documents.

6.8 The Consultant will only consider shop drawings bearing the stamp of the Contractor and
all Subcontractors involved. Check for all pertinent information such as physical
dimensions, make, performance, electrical characteristics and indicate the intended use
and location before submitting these drawings. Use reference symbols or enumeration to
correspond to the design drawings.


Page 8 of 25

6.9 Assume responsibility for accuracy of equipment dimensions related to space available,
accessibility for maintenance and service, compliance with inspection authorities codes.
Ensure that shop drawings indicate working weights of all equipment.

6.10 The submission of samples, wherever required by Consultant, will be subject to the same
procedure as that of shop drawings. One set of such samples shall be required to be
brought to site and kept there after approval till substantial completion.

6.11 The Consultant will mark the drawings "Approved / Approved with comments / Revise and
Resubmit / Not Approved. Contractor shall resubmit accordingly.

6.12 The Consultant is not responsible for any delays caused by the inadequacy of the
Contractor's drawings or his failure to obtain initial or subsequent approval. Any time taken
by the Contractor to obtain approval after the originally scheduled date will be
considered as a delay to the contract caused by the Contractor.

6.13 The Consultant's review shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations
from the Contract documents, unless he has, in writing, called the Consultant's attention to
such deviations at the time of submission of drawings. The Consultant's approval shall not
relieve the Contractor from the entire responsibility. Any approval by the Consultant shall
be on the understanding that any item submitted shall be ordered with options and
modifications to fully meet the specification. Any fabrication, erection, setting out or other
work done in advance of receipt of stamped drawings shall be done entirely at the
Contractor's risk and cost.

6.14 Furnish prints of the reviewed details to all other parties who may require them for proper
coordination of their work, and furnish all information necessary for the work as a whole.

6.15 Obtain Manufacturers' installation directions to aid in the proper execution of the work.
Submit two copies of such directions to the Consultant prior to installation, for use in
inspecting the work.

7.0 RECORD (AS-BUILT) DRAWINGS

7.1 As the job progresses mark on one set of prints to accurately indicate the status of installed
work. Have the prints available for inspection at the site at all times. 30 days before
commissioning, finalise the As Built drawings and submit 2 sets as draft to the consultant for
checking and approval. Upon approval, submit one set of transparencies and three sets
of prints to the consultant for onward transmission to the client. Also submit a CD
containing soft copies of all As Built drawings and technical details of all systems and
equipments.

7.2 Show on the record drawings the installed inverts of all services entering and leaving the
building and the property. Dimension underground services at key points of every run in
relation to structure and building. Record all elevations for underground services in relation
to floor level of the building and give reference datums to Municipal benchmarks.

8.0 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

8.1 Upon successful commissioning, submit one draft of Operation and Maintenance Manuals
for review and approval of Consultant.

Separate binders shall be used as follows :

Page 9 of 25

1. HVAC.
2. Electrical
3. Low Current Systems.
4. Fire alarm system.
5. Central battery system.
6. Plumbing and Drainage.
7. Fire and Safety.
8. Any Services other than above.

8.2 The minimum information required is as follows :

1. Catalogs highlighting the Make, Model and other necessary details for all Material
and Equipment installed.
2. List of Local Agents / Suppliers for all Materials and Equipment with Telephone, Fax
and Email address.
3. Detailed description of systems operation.
4. Procedures for Preventive, regular and the breakdown maintenance, with
Manufacturers Operation and Maintenance Catalog for all Systems / Equipments.
5. Commissioning data for all Systems / Equipment.
6. List of recommended spares. (Ensure availability of the spares for at least 7 years).
7. Diagnosis of faults / remedy action guidelines.

8.3 Upon approval of the draft by the Consultant, submit 4 set of manuals to Consultants for
onward submission to the Owner. Atleast one set of the manuals shall contain originals of
catalogues and brochures.

9.0 TEMPORARY SERVICE.

9.1 Do not use any of the permanent service facilities during construction, unless specific
written approval is obtained from the Consultant and the Owner or where specifically
allowed elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

9.2 In the event that mains power is not available or is not of sufficient capacity for
commissioning and testing, supply, install and operate diesel generator(s) of the correct
capacity.

Any generator must have full safety features and must be maintained regularly to ensure
site power at all times.

10.0 COOPERATION

10.1 Confer with all trades installing equipment which may affect the work of this division, and
arrange equipment in proper relation with that equipment installed under all Divisions of
the Contract.

10.2 Furnish all items to be built in by others, in time, complete with all pertinent information,
commensurate with the progress of the work.

10.3 Store materials neatly and out of the way and clean up all refuse caused by the work
daily.

11.0 EXISTING WORK AND EQUIPMENT

Page 10 of 25

Before this Contractor undertakes work in any area he must prepare a list of deficiencies in
that area which affect his works, or which could possibly be construed as being caused by
himself if not noted. In the event that such deficiency list is not prepared, then he shall be
deemed responsible for such deficiencies. Any list shall be brought to the attention of the
Consultant forthwith.

12.0 SUPERVISION.

12.1 The Subcontractor will maintain at site, as necessary for the performance of the Contract,
qualified personnel and supporting staff, with proven experience in erecting, testing, and
adjusting projects of comparable nature and complexity.

12.2 Before commencing work the Contractor will submit details of the proposed Engineers and
Supervisors, including copies of their Certificates. If in the Consultant's opinion the proposed
Engineers or Supervisors are not adequately qualified or are otherwise unacceptable, the
onus is on the Contractor to submit alternates until such approval is given.

12.3 Where the Contractor's staff becomes during the Contract deficient in performance, the
Contractor is to remedy the situation by immediate and appropriate replacement, to
Consultants approval.

12.4 Approval of the Contractor's Engineers or Staff shall in no way prevent the withdrawal of
that approval at any time during the Contract should the Consultant so desire. In the event
of such disapproval, Contractor will be required to rectify the position as stated above
within 14 days.

12.5 In the event of any negligent or severely detrimental behavior the Consultant has the right
to order the removal from site of any Engineer, Supervisor, or worker on a forthwith" basis.

13.0 CLEANING.

13.1 Each day as the work proceeds and on completion, clean up and remove from the
premises all rubbish, surplus material, equipment, machinery, tools, scaffolds, and other
items used in the performance of the work. Clean out dirt and debris and leave the
buildings broom clean with no stains and in a condition acceptable to the Consultant.

13.2 Where electrical items form part of the visible finish in the rooms, protect from
over-painting, etc. and give all items a final cleaning before handing over of the project.

14.0 ACCESSIBILITY, ACCESS PANELS AND DOORS.

14.1 Any item of equipment requiring maintenance shall be located so as to be accessible for
maintenance or repair without removing adjacent structures, equipment, pipings, ducts or
other materials.

14.2 Install all concealed equipment requiring adjustment or maintenance in locations easily
accessible through access panels or doors. Install systems and components to result in a
minimum number of access panels. Indicate access panels on as-built drawings.

14.3 Provide the respective Division of work with panels, doors or frames, complete with all
pertinent information for installation.

Page 11 of 25

Ensure that access doors are installed in a manner to match the building grids where
applicable.

14.4 Prepare detail drawings showing location and type of all access doors in coordination with
other trades before proceeding with installation and hand these to the Contractor to
obtain approval.

14.5 Size all access doors to provide adequate access and commensurate with the type of
structure and Architectural finish. Should it be necessary for persons to enter, provide a
minimum opening of 600 x 450mm.

14.6 Ensure proper fire rating of access doors in fire separations

14.7 Lay-in type ceiling tiles, if properly marked may serve as access panels.

14.8 The access panels shall be constructed and shall have finishing to match surrounding
architectural construction and finishes and shall be to engineers approval or as specified
elsewhere in the contract documents.

15.0 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY

15.1 The appointed Contractor shall accept full functional responsibility for all electrical services
to meet the requirements of the Client/Engineer and generally in accordance with this
specification.

15.2 The Contractors tender submission shall include for all the necessary material, plant,
equipment and systems to meet the Engineer's approval whether specifically mentioned
herein or not.

The scope of work shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:-

(a) LV site cabling.
(b) All main and sub-main switchgear with allowance for future extension.
(c) All internal LV and control cabling.
(d) All emergency and escape lighting.
(e) All lighting and lighting control system
(f) All Fire alarm and life safety installations.
(g) All low current system installations.
(h) All telecommunication / data system installations.
(i) All Security & Access control system installations.
(j) Electrical services for mechanical services plant.

15.3 Design Parameters

The electrical system equipment selection and installation shall comply with the particular
requirements listed hereunder:


Page 12 of 25

15.4 Site Conditions

All electrical equipment and components shall be selected and installed such as to
operate satisfactorily and safely under the following climatic conditions.

Maximum shade temperature in summer 50 deg. C
Direct sun temperature in summer 84 deg. C
Minimum ambient temperature in winter 2.8 deg. C
Relative humidity max 100
Rusty atmosphere

15.5 System of Supply

Three phase, neutral and separate protective conductor (TT).

The system of supply shall be at 380V / 400V 3Ph, 50HZ with a maximum short circuit
capacity of 50 KA for 1 second at the main bus bar of the LV Switch Board.

The electrical system shall have following system variations at the sub-station:
Voltage +/- 6%
Frequency +/- 4%

16.0 HIGH VOLTAGE NETWORK

16.1 The contractor shall be responsible for all negotiations with the DEWA to ensure that
supplies are available to meet the construction programme. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to execute all civil construction work connected with the HV Distribution
Network as required by DEWA. All costs associated with acquiring permanent incoming
mains supply including all civil works shall be included in the contract except for the power
connection charges which shall be paid by the client.

17.0 AUTHORITIES APPROVAL.

17.1 The contractor shall be responsible for liaising with DEWA, ETISALAT/DU and the Civil
Defence Authority and any other authorities after obtaining the Consultant's approval, in
order to :-

(a) Approve the shop Drawings, before ordering any equipment, and commencing
with the installation.

(b) Approve any excavation prior to installation;

(c) Acquire main supply connection;

(d) Approve the Fire Alarm, Telephone systems etc.

18.0 REGULATIONS

The installation shall be carried out in accordance with the current edition and
supplements of the following Regulations and Standards: -

(a) Statutory Regulations of DEWA.

Page 13 of 25

(b) It is the contractor's responsibility to ensure that the electrical work and installation
meets with the requirements of the relevant authorities and there shall be no
extra cost whatsoever paid by the client due to the requirement of the
authorities.

(c) IEE regulations with latest amendments.

(d) All relevant BS, IEC Standards.

(f) Other appropriate regulations under statute.

(g) Requirements of BS 7671, 1992

19.0 DEFINITIONS

For the purpose of this Specification:

(1) The definitions given in the IEE Regulations for Electrical Installations apply.

(2) The words "weatherproof" and "dust protecting" shall have the meanings ascribed
to them in the relevant regulations.

(3) The words "complete installation" in clause 1.1 shall mean not only the major items
of plant and apparatus conveyed by the Specification, but all the incidental
sundry components necessary for the complete execution of the works and for the
proper operation of the installation, with their labour charges, whether or not these
sundry components are mentioned in detail in the tender documents issued in
connection with the contract.

20.0 PHASE IDENTIFICATION

The cable connected to phase "R" shall be in all cases coloured Red, the cables
connected to phase 'Y' shall be coloured Yellow, and the cables connected to phase B
shall be coloured Blue. The neutral conductor shall in all cases be Black. Any insulated
earth wires shall be coloured Green or Green/Yellow. These colours shall be continued up
to the actual terminals or cable lugs.

21.0 VOLTAGE DROP

The voltage drop between the incoming LV switchboard and the extremity of any circuit
shall not exceed 4% of the nominal supply voltage.

22.0 TELECOMMUNICATIONS INTERFERENCE

The whole of the electrical installation work shall be so designed that there is an absolute
minimum of interference with telecommunications, and the reception of broadcasting to
BS 800 or any other relevant BS.

23.0 SEGREGATION OF SERVICES


Page 14 of 25

The armour of all cables, cable trays, trunking, ducts etc., shall be prevented from coming
into contact with non-electrical services by minimum spacing of 150mm. Where this is
impracticable they shall be bonded to the exposed metal of the other service through a
protective conductor.

24.0 BUILDER'S WORK

To reduce the necessity for cutting away and the like, certain holes and chases will be
provided in the structure by the Contractor to the Engineer's instructions.

The Contractor shall plan his work so that full advantage is taken of these provision's but it is
the Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure that all holes and chases are in the required
position and that any additional ducts, holes and chases necessary for the execution of his
work in the in-situ concrete walls, floor slabs, columns and beams are executed in the early
stage of construction of the building.

25.0 FOUNDATION BOLTS AND SUPPORTS

25.1 The Contractor shall arrange for the supply of, in advance of the delivery of the
equipment, all necessary foundation bolts, nuts, plates, sleeves and anchorages as and
when directed.

25.2 All cable trays, cable trunkings, light fittings and any other electrical components shall be
installed and supported using a standard product recommended by the manufacturer,
where such support is not a standard product range. The contractor shall only use
galvanized material to engineer's approval as a support.

26.0 DESIGN AND STANDARDISATION

26.1 The Works shall be executed to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs for use where
continuity of operation is the first consideration. All equipment supplied shall ensure
satisfactory operation under working conditions. All plant containing rotating parts shall be
capable of operating at speeds up to the maximum duty specified without vibration or
excessive noise.

26.2 Corresponding parts throughout the Contract Works shall be made to gauge and shall be
interchangeable wherever possible. The Contractor may be required by the Engineer to
prove interchangeability by actual interchanging of the various parts.

26.3 Suitable provision by means of eyebolts or other means are to be provided to facilitate
handling of all items that are too heavy or bulky for lifting and carrying by two men (70 kg).

27.0 MATERIALS, SHOP DRAWINGS AND WORKMANSHIP

27.1 The contractor shall be responsible to obtain the Consultant's approval on the detailed
working drawings prior to ordering any equipment and commencing the installation.

27.2 Separate drawings shall be provided for each electrical system.


Page 15 of 25

27.3 The contractor shall be responsible for preparing a dimensional shop drawing showing the
exact location and mounting height of the different components.

27.4 The contractor shall also be responsible for preparing enlarged scale details, sections and
elevations wherever requested by the Engineer.

27.5 If requested by the Engineer, the contractor shall forward coordinated shop drawings
showing the exact locations of all services.

27.6 In addition to the above, the Contractor shall forward schematic diagrams for all system.
The schematic diagram shall include all details requested by the Engineer.

27.7 It is a requirement of the specification that the finished appearance of the plant in public
areas is of a high architectural standard and all panels, covers, trim panels, finishes and
the like shall be included to provide this required appearance to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.

27.8 The whole of the equipment supplied shall be of durable finish and suitable for installation
in a modern building.

27.9 The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the components of each system are
mutually compatible and integrated to form fully efficient systems complying with the
Drawings and specifications.

27.10 All materials shall be, where applicable, in accordance with the IEE, BS Regulations, UL
Specifications, Factories Act and Insurance Company requirements, where such exists,
unless otherwise specified or agreed by the Engineer in writing.

27.11 All articles and materials specified to conform to the Standards shall be clearly and
indelibly marked and stamped with the Standard number specified and other details
required by the regulations, except where marking is impracticable when the relevant
advice/delivery notes shall include the Standard number with which they are to comply.

27.12 All materials and workmanship shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer, particular
attention shall be paid to a neat orderly well arranged installation, carried out in a
methodical competent manner.

The contractor shall be responsible to replace all the unsatisfactory work to the engineer
without any extra cost and to the standard required by the consultant. This also applies to
any item which is found to be defective in service during the maintenance period or
extended maintenance as appropriate.

27.13 No person shall be allowed to execute any type of work which is normally carried out by a
skilled tradesman unless he is thoroughly experienced and proficient in the trade
concerned. The Engineer shall have the option to require a tradesman to demonstrate his
proficiency to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

28.0 SAMPLES

Whenever requested, the Contractor shall provide a sample properly labelled of all
lighting fittings, switches, fittings and other like accessories described in this specification
or as specified by the Engineer.


Page 16 of 25

Such samples shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval at his offices or elsewhere
as directed, with all parts left loose, so that they may be taken apart for internal
inspection by hand without the necessity of using spanners, screw drivers or wrenches.

29.0 STORAGE OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

29.1 All plant and equipment shall be stored off the ground under weather-proof cover until
ready for incorporation in the works. All electrical apparatus shall be examined and
cleaned before installation. All open conduit ends shall be fitted with plastic caps or
suitable protective covering to prevent the ingress of foreign matter. All drums with cables
shall be protected from direct sunlight.

29.2 Protect the building and structures from damage due to carrying out the work.

29.3 Protect all electrical works from damage. Keep all equipment dry and clean at all times.

29.4 The contractor shall be responsible for and make good any damages caused directly or
indirectly to any walls, floors, wood work, brickwork, finishes, services etc.

30.0 PAINTING (ELECTRICAL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT)

30.1 Where it is the usual practice of the manufacturer of items such as electric motors,
switchgear, control panels, and similar equipment, to apply a high standard of
protective paint work in the shop before dispatch, this will be acceptable provided
any damage to paint work on the plant and equipment which occurs is made good
by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The interiors of control panels,
switchboards and switchgear, finish paint (two coats work) shall comply with the
appropriate standard for enamel finish and the exteriors of such panels shall be of an
British Standard colour to give a minimum reflection value of 42%.

30.2 Instruments shall be finished dull black and control handles, push buttons and similar fittings
shall be chromium plated or otherwise specially finished to the approval of the Engineer.

30.3 All items of equipment installed above the intalite suspended ceiling shall be painted with
a matt black finish.

31.0 LABELS

31.1 Identification labels of 'traffolite' or other approved material engraved black on white
both in Arabic and English language unless otherwise agreed, with not less than 5mm
'lino' style letters shall be fixed on or adjacent to all controls, switches and distribution
gear by means of at least two brass screws. Socket outlets of voltage other than 220
volt AC shall be similarly identified or engraved.

31.2 The labels shall bear the identifications shown on the drawings, such as identification,
designation, function and where necessary, phase and voltage.

31.3 Each distribution board shall be complete with a chart protected by transparent plastic
and fixed securely to the inside of the lid indicating details of each circuit controlled by the
board. These details shall contain points of utilization served, number and size of
conductors and type of wiring.


Page 17 of 25

31.4 A permanent warning labels durably marked Earth Connection Do not Disconnect shall
be permanently fixed in a visible position near each earthing and bonding connection.

31.5 A mimic diagram shall be provided on each main, submain panel board and on each
motor control centre.
32.0 INSPECTION AND TESTS AT MANUFACTURER'S WORKS

32.1 The Engineer shall have at all reasonable times access to the Contractor's premises to
inspect and examine the materials and workmanship of the plant and equipment during
its manufacture there, and if part of the plant and equipment is being manufactured on
other premises, the Contractor shall obtain for the engineer permission to inspect as if the
plant and equipment was manufactured on the Contractor's own premises. Such
inspection, examination or testing, if made, shall not relieve the Contractor from any
obligation under the Contract.

32.2 All work, materials and the like rejected shall be corrected or replaced as necessary at the
Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

32.3 Where the plant and equipment is a composite unit of several individual places
manufactured in different places, it shall be assembled and tested as one complete
working unit. All equipment will be tested at the maker's works to the relevant standards
where applicable.

32.4 The aforementioned works tests carried out before delivery to the Site shall not in any way
relieve the Contractor of completing satisfactory site tests after erection as specified.

32.5 The contractor shall give the Engineer reasonable notice, at least seven clear days in
writing of the date on and the place at which any plant or equipment will be ready for
testing as provided in the contract and the Engineer shall thereupon at his discretion notify
the contractor of his intention either to release such part of the plant and equipment upon
receipt of the works tests certificates or of his intention to inspect such part of the plant and
equipment and shall then, on giving twenty-four hours notice in writing to the Contractor,
attend at the place so named within seven days of the date by which the contractor has
stated in his notice the said plant and equipment will be ready for testing. The Contractor
shall forward to the Engineer six duly certified copies of the test readings.

32.6 Whether at the premises of the Contractor or of any of his sub-contractors, the Contractor
except where otherwise specified shall provide, free of charge, such labour, materials,
electricity, fuel, water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be reasonably
demanded, to carry out efficiently such tests of the plant and equipment, in accordance
with the contract and shall give facilities to the Engineer to accomplish such testing.

32.7 Works tests shall also be carried out such that due consideration is given to the Site
conditions under which the equipment is required to function. The test certifications shall
give all details of such tests.

32.8 As and when any plant and equipment shall have passed the tests referred to in this clause
the Engineer shall issue to the Contractor a notification to that effect.

32.9 The Contractor shall not pack for delivery or transport to Site any part of the plant or
equipment until he has obtained from the Engineer his written approval to the release of
such part for delivery after any tests required by the Engineer in terms of this clause
have been completed to his satisfaction.

Page 18 of 25

32.10 In particular, inspection and test at the makers works will be required for standby
Generator, UPS and Electrical Switchboard.

33.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING AT SITE

33.1 Upon completion of the installation or part of the installation, the Contractor shall carry out
and be responsible for the testing and commissioning all plant, equipment and integral
systems, in stages if required, to ensure that it is in proper working order and capable of
performing all of its functions in accordance with the specification and to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all equipment until each item
of plant, equipment or system or part thereof has been tested, commissioned and
accepted by the Engineer.

33.2 Any equipment damaged in commissioning shall be replaced by new plant by the
Contractor at his own expense and the plant, equipment or system concerned shall be
re-tested and commissioned. No instruction or action of the Engineer shall relieve the
Contractor of this responsibility.

33.3 All testing and commissioning shall be carried out according to the requirements of the
relevant Standards and regulations as may be stated or implied in this specification.
Contractor shall prepare proper standard inspections, tests and commissioning forms and
submit for approval by Engineers and Clients.

33.4 The Contractor shall give to the Engineer in writing at least ten days notice of the date
after which he will be ready to make the specified tests on completion of installation.
Unless otherwise agreed the tests shall take place within seven days after the said date on
such day or days as the Engineer shall in writing notify the Contractor. The tests shall as far
as possible be carried out under normal working conditions to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and shall extend over such periods as he may direct.

33.5 If in the opinion of the Engineer the tests are being unduly delayed, he may by notice in
writing call upon the Contractor to make such tests within ten days from the receipt of the
said notice and the Contractor shall make the said tests within the said ten days and notify
the Engineer of the days on which the said tests are to be made. If the Contractor fails to
make such tests within the time aforesaid the Engineer may himself proceed to make the
tests. All tests so made by the Engineer shall be at the risk and expense of the Contractor.

33.6 The Contractor shall provide all skilled labour, supervision, apparatus and instruments
required for commissioning and testing and within a reasonable time thereafter furnish to
the Engineer six certificates of all tests performed and accepted, signed by the Engineer,
the Contractor and an authorized person acting on behalf of DEWA as prescribed in the
appropriate Regulations and Specifications.

33.7 If any part of the plant or equipment fails to pass the specified tests, further tests shall, if
required by the Engineer, be repeated. The Contractor shall, without delay, put in hand
such modifications as are necessary to meet the requirements as described in the
Contract and any expense which the Employer may have incurred by reason of such
further tests may be deducted from the Contract Price.

33.8 The Contractor shall include for submission of working drawings for the electrical installation
to the DEWA for approval and shall allow for the procurement of the DEWA test certificate
upon completion of the building following inspection of the electrical installation by DEWA.

Page 19 of 25

Acceptance shall not in any way absolve the Contractor of his responsibility for the
performance of the plant or equipment after erection as a complete working system in all
respects.

34.0 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE.

34.1 The ultimate condition for system acceptance is that the Owner and Consultant have
inspected the system and found it to be acceptable, and indicated this in writing.

Issuance of the final payment certificate does not necessarily indicate system
acceptance, neither does release of final payment holdback in whole or in part. The
Consultant's acceptance may be contingent on any or all of the following if applicable:

34.1.1 Submit original copies of letters from manufacturers of all systems indicating that their
technical representatives have inspected and tested the respective systems and are
satisfied with the methods of installation, connections and operation.

34.1.2 Submit "as built" drawings and operation and maintenance manuals.

34.1.3 Train owner's maintenance staff.

35.0 CORRECTION AFTER COMPLETION.

35.1 Remedy all work in accordance with the General Conditions of Contract during the
Maintenance period.

35.2 Attend immediately to any and all the defects occurring during the period defined above
and repair in a manner to prevent recurrence. This contractor is responsible for all work
required by other trades necessary to repair the works of this section, or necessary to repair
damage caused by the failure of any part of this section.

35.3 Instruct all Suppliers and Manufacturers that guarantees on equipment will commence
when the completed work is accepted and not from the date the equipment is put into
operation. In the event that this condition is omitted by the supplier, or if subsequent cost
to the Owner is involved. Contractor shall be liable for such costs.

36.0 GUARANTEES

36.1 The Contractor will guarantee all material and workmanship for at least 12 months after
preliminary take over by the Owner.

36.2 All guarantees from equipment suppliers will be vested in the Owner, regardless of whether
the Contractor who supplied the equipment is still associated with the project or not.

36.3 Guarantees will be full guarantees and will include all overhead, profit, incidental charges
and sundries.

36.4 Where damage is caused to any other item by any failure of the item guaranteed, then
the guarantee shall also include the costs incurred in rectifying that damage.

37.0 MAINTENANCE.

Page 20 of 25

37.1. Maintenance is defined as the Contractual Liability to maintain the equipment in working
condition, PLUS the regular checks and servicing of equipment during the maintenance
period, including all the consumables and spare parts to keep the equipment in best
working order.

37.2. Regular maintenance shall be as necessary, but in any event not less frequently than
monthly. Breakdown calls shall be attended immediately.

37.3. Maintenance period shall be 1 year from the date of handing over for all Electrical works.

37.4 Proper / satisfactory forms of procedure and schedules of maintenance shall be preared
complying with manufacturers recommendations. These forms shall be submitted for
approval by Engineer / Client prior to starting of the maintenance period. Also, a list of
contact persons / parties for attending complaints / emergency around the clock shall be
submitted.


Page 21 of 25

SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS


Page 22 of 25

38.0 SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS

All the materials supplied under this contract shall be from one of the manufacturers listed
below. No alternate Makes shall be accepted unless all the listed Makes are unavailable.
Materials proposed from listed Makes also must fully comply with Detailed Specifications.
Country of Origin, where listed, must be complied.

1. MDBs / SMDBs / DBs / MCCs / Changeover Panel / Isolator

SR. MAKE ENCLOSURE
1. ABB Logstrup
2. Siemens Siemens
3. Schneider Schneider

(Assembled and tested only by the above respective Authorized Local Agent)

2. Cables and Accessories Ducab
Riyad Cables
Oman Cables
Jeddah Cables

3. Cable trays / Ladders Wiremold - UK
Wire Baskets OBO Bettermann Germany
Wibe Sweden
Cablofil France

4. Cable Trunking Barton
Wiremold
MK
OBO Bettermann

5. Heat Resistant Cable ( 90 C) Tekab
Draka
Riyadh Cables
Ducab
Pirelli


Page 23 of 25

6. Wiring accessories
Make White plastic Slimline metal finish
MK Aspect insignia
MEM Spectra grid Ultra
Legrand Mosaic Synergy modern
Clipsal Mega 2000 Gains Borough
classic
Contactum Grid Flat Plate

7. GI Box Barton
Decoduct
Appleby
Clipsal
Elektra

8. PVC conduits and Accessories Decoduct
Marshall Tufflex
Clipsal

9. G.I. Conduit and fittings Barton
Maruchi
Walsal
WM Interface

10. PVC Coated Flexible GI Conduit Kopex
Adaptaflex
Lappcable
WM Interface

11. Fire Alarm System Simplex - USA
Edwards Canada
Gent 34000 - UK
Notifier - USA
Siemens USA

12. Fire Alarm Cable Pirelli
Firetuff
GST
Cavicell

13. Earthing system, Lightning Furse
Protection System, Electronic A. N. Wallis
Systems Protection, Surge Arrestors Erico
Kingsmill

14. Emergency Lighting System Prazissa - Germany
GFS - Germany
Cooper CEAG Germany
Enotec - Germany

15. Capacitor Banks Comar
Schneider

Page 24 of 25

ABB
Nokian Capacitors

16. Isolators Moeller
ABB
Schneider
GE
Siemens

17. Structured Cables / Fibre Optic Corning Corning - ME
Nordex Alpha Data
AvayaTelematics / Faronics
Siemon Beta
Krone - IAL

18. PA / Music System Merlaude - France
Bosch Holland
Bouyer Germany

19. Coaxial Cables Raydex
Belden
Commscope
Hrishman

20. CCTV System / DVMR ViconUK/USA
Bosch Holland
Siemens USA
Bewator UK
Group 4 - USA

21. Intelligent Lighting Control System Siemens EIB
Clipsal C Bus
ABB - EiB
F & G - EiB

22. Variable Frequency Drives / ABB
Soft Starters Siemens
Allen Bradley
Moeller
Danfoss

23. Dimming System Lutron
Helvar Electrosonic
Quantran
Polaron
Futronics

24. Generator Dawson Keith - UK
Caterpillar - USA
F.G Wilson - UK

25. Cable Glands / Lugs BICC
Ducab Connect

Page 25 of 25

HAWKE
CMP

26. UPS System Schneider France
Liebert Italy
Chloride France
GE Swiss
AROS - Italy

27. Access Control System ADC Technology - Singapore
DSX USA
Bewator UK
Siemens-Germany
Group 4 - USA

28. Nurse Call System Dukane
Intercall
Ackermann
Executon
Simplex

29. Audio / Visual System Sony
JVC
Panasonic

30. Explosion proof Accessories Legrand
Simplex

31. Clock System Simplex
Dukane

32. Light Fittings Refer Schedule of light fittings

*-------------------- * -------------------- *

Note : All Fire related Materials e.g. Fire Alarm, Fire Fighting, Fire Stop Materials, Central
Emergency Lighting, Fire Dampers etc., must have Local Civil Defence Deptt. approval.

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 2



Page 2 of 5

SECTION 2

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES- INDEX

1.0 LOCAL SWITCHES

2.0 POWER OUTLETS

3.0 FUSE CONNECTION UNITS/DP SWITCHES

4.0 GI BOXES

5.0 ACCESSORIES PLATE FINISH

6.0 MARKING AND LABELING

7.0 MOUNTING HEIGHTS


Page 3 of 5

1.0 LOCAL SWITCHES

1.1 The local switches shall be 20 amp. grid type one-way, two-way, intermediate or
double pole as indicated on the drawings. Where more than one switch is indicated at
any position multiple gang units shall be used.

1.2 Switches shall be of the quick start make, slow break type specially designed for AC
circuits to BS Standards. The operation of the switch shall not depend wholly on the
action of the spring. The switches shall generally be of the rocker operated type.

1.3 All switch boxes shall be supplied with adjustable steel grids and earthing terminals.

1.4 Generally, switch units shall be of the adjustable grid pattern and to be secured to the
adjustable grid by means of screws. For flush mounting switches the switch-plate shall
overlap all edges of the box by not less than 7mm. For surface mounting switches the
switchplate shall finish flush with the edges of the switch boxes. Switches for water
heaters and fan coil units shall be complete with neon indicator lights.

1.5 In Plant rooms the switch units shall be surface or flush as required.

1.6 Local switches shall be arranged in convenient positions for switching the various circuits
and generally as indicated on the drawings.

1.7 The switches shall be of the same manufacture for a particular type of switch
throughout the installation. All accessories in wet and damp areas shall be of the
splashproof type to IP54 protection standard.

1.8 All switch boxes should be galvanised steel.

1.9 To ensure easy and correct connection of the conductors during installation, the necessary
terminal shall be easily identified, grouped inline, upward facing, captive and backed out
prior to the installation.

2.0 POWER OUTLETS

2.1 The switch socket outlets, shall be in accordance with BS Standard as appropriate and
shall be of the three pin grounding type.

2.2 Switch socket outlets being fed from essential and UPS sources shall be separately
identified with colour coded labels fixed on the plate. All rockers shall be with neon
indicators.

2.3 Live contact of the socket shall be completely shuttered such that it is not possible to
engage any pin of the plug into a live contact whilst any other pin of the plug is
exposed.

2.4 All floor mounted socket outlets shall be fixed as part of the under floor trunking service
boxes.

2.5 These outlets shall be of the same manufacturer throughout the installation.

2.6 The sockets shall have dual earth terminals as per BS 7671, 2001, Regulation 607. The
sockets shall also have the facility to connect clean earth.

Page 4 of 5

3.0 FUSE CONNECTION UNITS/DP SWITCHES

3.1 These shall be of flush or surface mounting type as manufactured in compliance with BS
Standard as appropriate. The fuse connection units shall incorporate integral switch, neon
indicator and 13 amp fuse links. The 20A DP switches shall be with flex outlet in base and
neon indication lights.

3.2 These shall be of the same manufacturer for a particular type of switch throughout the
installation and shall be complete with the other accessories installed.

4.0 GI BOXES
4.1 GI boxes to be provided with brass earth terminal to facilitate earth wire connection. The
boxes to have sufficient number of 20mm and 25mm knockout and shall comply with BS
4662. Boxes to have adjustable lug for proper installations of wiring accessories. Extension
ring to be used along with GI boxes, in places where the box is deep inside the wall,
marble or concrete.

5.0 ACCESSORIES PLATE FINISH

5.1 All the wiring accessories shall be vandal proof. The accessories plate shall have the
following finishes depending on the location where it is installed and on the feeding
arrangement.

Accessories shall be polished chrome type in all areas except as listed below :

- Accessories in plantrooms shall be metal clad type, and above false ceiling and
inside floor service boxes shall be white polycarbonate.

- Accessories in wet areas and as indicated on drawings shall be weatherproof to IP-
66.

- All external outlets shall be weatherproof to IP-66.

- Weatherproof range shall be suitable for semi recessed mounting and supplied
with back boxes.

- Isolators shall be IP65 for outdoor and plantroom installations

- Isolators feeding the fire and safety equipments (such as fire pumps, lifts, smoke
extract fans, basement ventilation fans, etc) shall be fire rated for 120 min.

- Accessories in Medical gas rooms and in the Oxygen tank yard shall be explosion
proof type.

- All switch plates including SSOs are to be coordinated with tiling layouts by prior
agreement with the Architect on site.

- All sockets within bed head units (other than patient rooms) shall be poly
carbonate

Page 5 of 5

6.0 MARKING AND LABELING
All circuits for lighting and power sockets shall be labeled and marked.

A dedicated label shall be engraved at the socket front face, another label shall be
provided at the back side of wiring accessory

All UPS sockets shall be provided in different color (RED)

7.0 MOUNTING HEIGHTS

Mounting heights of accessories shall be as detailed on Architectural drawings and in
compliance with statutory authority requirements. Installation shall be carried out as
detailed in fit-out plans. Proper co-ordination shall be ensured with relevant subtrades for
installation of accessories on furniture, medical service panels and the like. All necessary
containment and backboxes shall be provided to form a complete installation to the
approval of the Engineer. Such containment shall include but not limited to conduits,
ducts, raceways, skirting / DADO / Underfloor trunking and boxes, etc.

In General, the mounting heights shall be as follows:

Lighting Switches - 1200mm top above FLL
Switch socket outlets - 450mm bottom above FLL
Flex outlet A/C - near to unit
Flex Outlet Water Heater - near to Water Heater.
Kitchen equipments - as per kitchen layout drawings

Note: The 20A double pole switch shall be manufactured to BS 3676 Part 1 1989 and shall
be fitted with neon indicator. The double pole switch supplied for the water heaters shall
be engraved Water Heater.

STANDBY DIESEL GENERATOR

Page 1 of 10

SECTION 3



Page 2 of 10

SECTION 3


INDEX

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

2.0 CHARACTERISTICS OF GENERATOR GENERAL

3.0 DIESEL ENGINE AND ANCILLARIES

4.0 TESTING

5.0 FUEL SYSTEM

6.0 SOUND INSULATION OF THE ROOM

7.0 EXHAUST

8.0 BATTERY

9.0 CABLES

10.0 SELECTION

11.0 BMS INTERFACE


Page 3 of 10

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The contractor shall supply , install , test and commission a prime generating set with
separate fuel tank of suitable capacity to run the set for 9 hours at rated conditions.

The set shall be complete with all ancillary plant such as starting , fuel , fuel pump, fill in
point, fuel piping, exhaust , cooling , control and alarm panels , circuit breaker
interconnecting wiring , cabling and all other equipment required for the operation of
the sets as per but not limited to this specification .

2.0 CHARACTERISTIC (general) OF THE GENERATOR SETS

Ratings

2.1 Output - 400V , 50 Hz ,1500 Rpm ,0.8 p.f., 1850 KVA
3 phase.

Ambient temperature - 50 degree centigrade .
capability ( Manufacturers deration curves shall be provided )

Maximum speed - 1500 Rpm

If the site rating is less than stated rating then a detailed derating chart from the
manufacturer shall be provided.

The offered gensets shall be suitable for installation in closed purpose built generator
room.

2.2 Standards

The equipment and components shall comply with all relevant British / ISO / IEC
standard Specifications.

The machines shall be suitable for installation in an enclosed, ventilated engine room
shown on the relevant drawings.

2.3 DRAWINGS

Reference Drawings :

Basement - 1 power layout and Electrical schematic diagram.

2.3.1 The drawings are for tender purposes only and are to be read in conjunction with this
Specification. Any discrepancy between the drawings and the Specification and any
matter which requires clarification shall be referred to the Engineer during tender period.

The Contractor shall be responsible for the preparation of detailed installation drawings
for the complete works including associated builders work, and shall submit all drawings
to the Engineer for approval prior to the commencement of any work.

Approval of such drawings by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility to provide an installation suitable in dimension, construction, function and
finish for the purpose intended.

Page 4 of 10

This Specification and the Drawings are intended to indicate generally the arrangement
of apparatus required, but the Contractor will be deemed to have included in his tender
anything necessary to leave the installation complete and in proper working order to the
satisfaction of the Engineer whether or not such items are mentioned in the Specification
or shown on the Drawings.

3.0 DIESEL ENGINE AND ANCILLARIES

3.1 Diesel engine

The diesel engine shall be 4-stroke, either normally aspirated or supercharged and after-
cooled, water cooled, equipped with the following :

- Heavy duty air-cleaner, with service indicators
- Crank case breather
- Lubricating - oil engine driven pump
- Lubricating - oil simplex filter, with replaceable elements
- Lubricating - oil cooler
- Engine - driven jacket water pump
- Fuel filter, with service indicators
- Flexible fuel lines
- Fuel priming pump
- Dry exhaust manifold, fitting and flange
- Flywheel and flywheel housing
- Governor, Electronic
- Manual and automatic shut-off
- Oil pressure gauge
- Cooling water temperature gauge
- Digital Tachometer
- Electric starting - 24VDC.

3.2. Air filters

Air filters shall be suitable for use in the environmental conditions which are likely to arise
occasionally, with the atmosphere highly polluted by blown sand. They shall be fitted
with an Air filter condition indicator of the vacuum type which shall be fitted to the air
inlet manifold.

3.3 Cooling

Thermostatically controlled bypass valves shall be fitted to the engine cooling water
system to maintain cooling water at optimum temperature.

3.4 Governor

The governor shall be Electronic type. It shall control the speed within the limits laid
down in the respective Standards.

3.5 Engine shut - off.

The engine shall be fitted with a mechanically operated device which will shut off the
fuel supply to the engine when any of the specified alarm conditions occur. The device

Page 5 of 10

shall be fitted with one normally open and one normally closed contact which will trip
and lock-out the generator circuit breaker in the event of the automatic device
operating. Micro switches shall not be used in any direct current circuit nor in any
inductive circuit.

3.6 Starting System

The electric starting equipment shall be so designed that :-

(a) at engine speeds in excess of the minimum firing speed it shall be impossible to
complete the starting circuit and

(b) not more than three consecutive attempts to start may be made in any period
of 1 minute, each starting period and the period between such consecutive
attempts being automatically timed controlled by the equipment. At the failure
of the third attempt the starter circuit shall be locked out pending manual re-
setting.

3.7 Generator

The generator shall be of the brushless, revolving field, solid - state exciter type, single
bearing construction, directly coupled to and sharing a common high bed plate with
diesel engine and the radiator.

The generator shall be complete with all necessary cooling fans, excitation and voltage
regulating equipment. The excitation system shall not include a commutator.

The generator shall be star connected.
The generator shall be capable of maintaining the continuous maximum rated output
when operating within +/- 1% of rated voltage and at rated power factor.

The critical speed shall exceed twice the overspeed test value.

All windings shall be tropicalised and suitably impregnated to withstand the site ambient
conditions.

The generator shall meet the following requirements :
- IEC 34/1 standard requirements
- Class H insulation with tropicalisation and anti-abrasion
- Three - phase sensing.
- Drip - proof enclosure, IP22
- Pilot shaft alignment
- 150 % over speed capability.
- Less than 5 % wave form deviation
- Standard paralleling capability
- Volts per Hertz, generator mounted, digital automatic voltage regulator, three
phase sensing , assuring less than +/- 1% voltage regulation
- Adjustable voltage droop for parallel operation
- Adjustable voltage gain to compensate for engine speed droop and line loss.
- Less than 50 Telephone Influence Factor (TIF)
- Less than 3% Total Harmonics Factor (THF)
- Radio interference suppressed to the limits specified in BS 800
The generator shall also be equipped with manual voltage control.

Page 6 of 10

3.7.1 Exciter

The core and poles of the exciter shall be made of high permeability low loss steel
stamping tightly clamped and secured to minimize magnetic noise. The characteristics
of the exciter shall comply fully with the operational requirements of the alternator in
matching the required loading conditions. PM excited generators shall be provided.

3.7.2 Ventilation of generator and exciter.

The generator and exciter shall incorporate shaft mounted fans of sufficient capacity to
provide the machine cooling effects necessary to comply with the temperature
requirements of the Specification when operating in the specified ambient conditions.

3.7.3 Voltage Regulation

Continuously active, quick acting automatic excitation control equipment responsive to
the generator line to line voltage and loading conditions shall be provided to maintain
the alternator voltage within the prescribed limits. Equipment will be based wholly on
static state devices. Variable Regulation capability regulators shall be preferred.
Diode monitor and loss of excitation protection shall be provided.

The equipment shall include all selector switches, indicating instruments, rectifiers,
resistors and any other auxiliary components necessary for the satisfactory opeation of
the plant.

A voltage setting device capable of adjusting the required voltage in steps of 1 volt
between the limits of 90% and 110% of normal voltage at any load within the rating of
the machine shall be mounted on the control panel.

When the generator maximum continuous load at rated power factor is rejected, the
regulator equipment shall be capable of limiting the generator momentary over voltage
to a value not exceeding 125% rated voltage and shall restore the voltage to within 1%
of the nominal present value within 3 seconds.
Over-voltage/undervoltage and overexcitation protection shall be provided.
3.8 Set Mountings

The diesel engine, the generator and exciter, and the radiator shall be mounted a
common welded steel bedplate. Where flange mounted generators are not employed,
the bedplates shall be stress relieved before machining.

Lifting points shall be provided on the bedplate.

Suitable anti-vibration mounting shall be supplied for the diesel generator unit, and all
set mounted ancillary apparatus.

Flexible connections shall be provided to all exhaust, air, fuel and water piping to avoid
fracture due to vibration and to minimize conduction of noise.

Any necessary foundation bolts shall be supplied under this Contract.

3.9 Safety Guards.
All moving parts shall be adequately guarded in accordance with BS 1649 and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer, in order to prevent danger to personnel.

Page 7 of 10

3.10 Generator set control equipment

The control equipment is designed to start and stop the set automatically from a remote
signal.
The signal will be issued by the Automatic mains failure panel as described elsewhere.

The generator set control equipment shall be set mounted and shall be based on
microprocessor based system to provide maximum system flexibility

The control function shall be provided with an OFF/ MANUAL/AUTO/COOLDOWN STOP
switch.

3.10.1 The following digital measuring instruments with liquid crystal display shall be fitted :

- an ammeter - 3 phase
- a voltmeter - 3 phase -
- a 3 position ammeter/voltmeter selector switch
- a frequency meter, in Hz and rpm
- an hours - run meter.
- power factor meter
- Coolant Temperature
- KW (total & per phase)
- KVA , KVAR , KW-Hr meter
- Oil Pressure
- System Diagnostic

3.10.2 Automatic shut-down and lock-out circuits shall be fitted for :

- low oil pressure
- Over voltage/Under voltage
- Low coolant level
- Over current
- Reverse power

3.10.3 Indicator lamps shall be fitted, together with a lamp-test push-button for :

- low oil pressure shut down
- high water temperature shut-down
- overspeed sit-down
- failure to start/overcrank
- Emergency stop
- Fault shutdown/Alarm.
- 2 spare external faults.

3.10.4 A manually re-set, master shut-down relay shall be provided on the control panel, so
arranged that upon the occurrence of the specified fault conditions the relay shall
automatically :-

(a) break the closing circuit of the circuit-breaker.
(b) make the tripping circuit of the circuit-breaker.
(c) stop the engine.
(d) close the voltage free contact for a remote alarm.

Page 8 of 10

Simultaneously, an audible alarm shall be given, and the cause of the stoppage shall be
displayed and remain displayed on the control panel and the building management
system until the alarm device is manually re-set.

When the control selector switch is in the AUTO position, the audible alarm shall be
operative.

The control panel shall have a self-diagnostic feature to asses the condition of the
various senders and sensing components.

An adjustable run on off load timer, shall be fitted to provide cool down running.

All individual circuits such as voltmeter, shutdown circuits etc. shall be adequately
protected by fuses.

All control wiring shall be carried out in PVC insulated cable termination and relative
terminals shall be clearly marked.

Engine wiring shall be protected by non-metallic conduit.

The control equipment shall also include a breaker as shown on drawings complete with
short-circuit magnetic and thermal overload trips, separately housed in a sheet steel
enclosure adjacent to the control panel. A shunt trip & Auxiliary contacts shall also be
provided. A separate enclosure fixed on the breaker, enclosure with busbars extending
from the breaker shall be provided and the outgoing power cables shall be terminated
on the busbars.

Separate busbar cubicle must be provided to enable termination of multicore cables.

4.0 TESTING

The set shall be subjected to the following works tests at the factory prior to Shipment. All
Certificates must be submitted for prior approval. The same tests shall be repeated at
the Suppliers local facility before delivery the set to site.

(1) General inspection of equipment to check its compliance with specification

(2) Timed Start from operation of push button to acceptance of full load.

(3) 1/2 hour 50 % load
1 hour 100 % load

(4) Determination of voltage and frequency regulations under following load
changes :

(a) No load to 110 % load in steps not exceeding 25%
(b) 100 % load to no load in a single step .

(5) Operation of all protection circuits by simulation.

(6) Operation of UPS fed loads on normal and generator supply (after installation at
site and commissioning).

Page 9 of 10

5.0 Fuel System

Fuel tank with capacity suitable for 24 hours 100% operation shall be made of stainless
steel sheets and fuel pipework shall be with MS pipes and fittings.

The tank shall be supplied and installed, fully piped up, to provide the service
requirements of the genset and as shown on drawings The tank shall be complete with
filler cap, contents gauge, overflow pipe, vent pipe and sludge valve. The fuel tank shall
be filled as required for testing and commissioning and shall be full at the time of
handing over.

6.0 Sound insulation of the room and Vibration Criteria

The contractor shall provide sound level data of the proposed equipment for review of
the Engineer. The noise level outside the genset room shall not exceed 75 dBA at 3
meters. Attenuators shall be provided for radiator discharge and air intake. The air
intake requirements shall be coordinated at site.

The generator base mounted springs shall be able to absorb 95% of the Engine
vibrations. Any louvers provided in generator room shall be of the acoustic type.

7.0 Exhaust

All exhaust gases shall be suitably piped outside the genset room . The engine shall be
efficiently, silenced and be complete with a silencer and all fixings to attach the silencer
to the generator room ceiling. In addition to erecting the silencer the Contractor shall
also be responsible for providing and erecting the fittings necessary to carry the tail pipe
through the generator room wall. All fixings shall be anti-vibration type where required
and galvanized. Exhaust pipes of the proper diameter, properly insulated with 50 thk
rockwool insulation and clad with 22G aluminum sheet, shall be supplied and installed.
They shall run from the exhaust silencers to the outside . The exhaust pipes shall
terminate with an adequate bend or cap to prevent ingress of rain.

The total exhaust noise attenuation shall be to 25dBA.

8.0 BATTERY STARTING

The equipment shall include an adequately rated maintenance free lead acid starter
battery together with a suitably rated charger. The battery charger shall be supplied
from the mains (standby supply) and an engine driven dynamo shall be used for boost
charging . The battery shall be protected against accidental, mechanical or electrical
damage and shall be housed in a purpose built rack.

The charger shall be mounted remote from the engine and shall include a battery
charge fail alarm.

Without power supply to the charger, the battery shall be capable of providing no fewer
than four starting cycles within a period of 5 minutes. Upon restoring power supply to the
charger immediately thereafter, the charger shall be capable of restoring the battery,
within 30 minutes, to a condition in which one more starting cycle can be completed.

The following instrumentation and protection shall be provided :


Page 10 of 10

* Charger failure

* Battery voltmeter

* Charge / discharge ammeter.

* On/off switch.

9.0 CABLES

All cables shall be supplied in accordance with local Electricity Authority and Civil Defence
regulations . A schedule of loads and cable sizes shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to commencement of any work.

10.0 SELECTION

Contractor shall provide detailed calculation and load shedding scheme to match the
capacity of the specified generator.

11.0 BMS INTERFACE

The Generator Control panel shall be equipped with necessary hardware and software for
integration with BMS for monitoring the following items :

1. Voltage
2. Frequency
3. Load Current
4. Diesel level.
5. Generator status (Auto / Manual).
6. High water temperature alarm.
7. High water temperature shutdown.
8. Low oil pressure alarm.
9. Low oil pressure shutdown.
10. Fail to start shutdown.
11. Overspeed shutdown.
12. System diagnostic shutdown.
13. Battery Status.

LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION

Page 1 of 13

SECTION 4


Page 2 of 13

SECTION 4

INDEX

1.0 MAIN LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD FORM 4

2.0 TESTS

3.0 DRAWINGS AND INFORMATION

4.0 AUTO CHANGE OVER PANEL

5.0 SUB MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARD

6.0 FINAL DISTRIBUTION BOARD

7.0 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER

8.0 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

9.0 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

10.0 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER

11.0 CONTACTORS / OVERLOAD RELAYS / CONTROL RELAYS / TIMERS

12.0 INDICATION LAMPS / PUSH BUTTONS / SELECTOR SWITCHES

13.0 SITE CONDITION

14.0 CODES AND STANDARDS

15.0 SWITCH BOARD OPERATORS MAT

16.0 VOLT METER AND AMMETER

17.0 COORDINATION

18.0 ENERGY MONITORING UNIT

19.0 THERMAL IMAGING


Page 3 of 13

1.0 Main Low Voltage Switchboard and Main Distribution Boards Form4b Type-6

1.1 The main LV Switchboard shall be of a free standing, cubicle type modular construction
system conforming to fully type tested designs, incorporating ACB's, MCCB's busbars,
fuses, measuring equipment etc. all as required and complying to the latest editions of
BS EN 61439-1. The switchboard shall be from a reputed manufacturer with an
established and IEC 439 - 1 certified quality assurance system to ISO 9001. Non certified
manufacturers will not be acceptable.

All circuit breakers and busbar ratings shall be as per the load schedules and drawings.
All circuit breakers and busbars shall be rated for 50C. All auxiliary power supplies shall
be provided as per the manufacturer's requirement.

1.2 Design & Construction:

1.2.1 Switchboard construction shall be designed to FORM 4, Type 7 standards for panels as
shown on drawings in accordance with IEC 439-1/ BS EN 61439-1. Busbars shall be in a
separate chamber, fully segregated from the rest of the switchboard. Additional insulating
material shall be provided behind the doors/plates of the busbar chamber. Individual
functional units shall be located in independent compartments.

1.2.2 In addition to compliance with FORM 4 standards, the switchboard shall be successfully
tested for safe containment of an internal arcing fault. Suitable ducts and vents for
individual functional units and busbars shall be incorporated in the switchboard to safely
divert the resultant over pressure and arcing away from the operator and adjacent
functional units. Allowing the gases to escape through the door into the cable way or out
through the back of the board will not be acceptable.

1.2.3 The switchboard shall be of a modular construction and be extendable on both sides.
Welded construction switchboards will not be accepted. The degree of protection shall be
at least IP 42 as defined in IEC 529.

1.2.4 Enclosures shall be made of sheet steel. The basic framework should be roll-formed from 1.6
to 2mm electro-galvanised steel coated with high-solid enamel, polyester electrostatic
spray and oven baked. The doors and panels shall be iron-phosphate steel, coated like the
framework but also with primer. The color shall be RAL 7032 (light grey) or equal. The base
frame shall be of minimum 3mm thick Electro galvanized steel.

1.2.5 Compartments shall be easily accessible for maintenance purposes. Barriers shall be
included between each compartment to contain an internal fault as defined in BS / IEC
standards to ensure safe maintenance on any outgoing circuit when the remainder of the
board is alive. Each compartment shall be provided with a separately fixed thermostat
controlled heater at the bottom.

1.2.6 The maximum height of the enclosure shall be 2400 mm. All meters, lamps, operating
handles shall be within a maximum height of 2000 mm. All dimensions shall be of uniform
appearance. All live conductors shall be shielded in such a manner that they cannot be
accidentally touched when the doors are open. All doors and plates shall be
interchangeable and may be hinged left, right, top and bottom as standard. Doors shall
be provided with an integral gasket and earth stud and a range of locks to meet all
regulations.

Page 4 of 13

1.2.7 All internal separations shall be from standard pre-fabricated plates. The usage of Bakelite,
fiber sheets or any other material to provide internal separation will not be acceptable.
The internal separation between compartments and sections shall be at least IP 40.

1.2.8 Suitable cableways shall be provided for each functional unit section. There shall be front
access for cabling purposes. It shall be possible to safely terminate or work on the outgoing
cables of any functional unit without having to switch off the main breaker or adjacent
functional units. Switchboards shall be suitable for bottom or top cable entry as specified.
All openings and entries shall be vermin proof. Switchboards shall be arranged such that
safe access (front, rear, side) may be readily obtained. Adjustable gland plates, adequate
channel frames and cable clamps for cable supports shall be provided.

1.3 Busbars:

1.3.1 Busbars shall be of rectangular cross section HDHC tinned copper and suitably rated for
continuos operation. The main busbar rating shall be the same throughout the entire
length of the switchboard. The busbars and primary connections shall comply with BS 159.
The surface temperature of the busbar shall not exceed 85C over an ambient of 50C.
Connections to incoming circuit breakers shall be of the same rating.

1.3.2 Busbars shall be installed in a separate chamber and shall run along the whole length of
the switchboard, which allows for easy extension in the future. Vertical droppers if any, shall
run behind each functional unit section. Busbars shall be rigidly supported along their entire
length. The busbar supports shall be of a high-grade polymer. The mechanical and
dielectric strength of the busbars and supports shall be capable of withstanding the worst
fault conditions and as per ASTA testing requirements.

1.3.3 The main busbar system shall be of a parallel 2 bar per phase arrangement . All
switchboards shall be complete with a neutral and earth bar running along the full length
of the panel. The cross section of the neutral bar shall be same as that of the phase
conductor and that of the earth bar is at least half the size as that of the phase bar.

1.3.4 Busbars and connections shall be color coded for phase identification and shall conform
to the phase sequence R-Y-B, counting from left to right ,upper to lower and from near to
remote when viewed from the operating side of the switchboard.

1.3.5 Under no circumstances will common earth / neutral bar be acceptable. Earth bars,
neutral bars and links shall be so located and mounted that access to them is not
obstructed by the structure or wiring of the switchboard and so that all outgoing neutral
and earth conductors can be readily and safely connected and disconnected without
moving other cables or disconnecting the incoming supply to the switchboard.

1.3.6 The main busbar shall be certified to withstand a fault level of at least 50KA for 1 second.
This certificate shall be from ASTA or an independent and recognized testing authority.

1.4 Panel wiring / Terminal Blocks / Labels:

1.4.1 All internal and control wiring shall be 600 / 1000V PVC insulated stranded copper cable to
BS 6231. All cables shall be adequately rated and not less than 2.5 sq.mm. , run on PVC
cables trays .. Each cable shall be properly terminated at both ends with loops. When
wiring is across door hinges, it shall be enclosed by a flexible PVC tubing and be looped to

Page 5 of 13

permit the opening of doors and removal of components for inspection. Plastic ferrules with
correct numbers shall be fitted on all wires to correspond with circuit number and diagram.

1.4.2 Terminal blocks for power and control wiring shall be of Cage Clamp connection
technique in which the only tool required is a flat bladed screwdriver .Once the
conductor is inserted ,the stainless steel cage clamp shall automatically provide the
correct clamping force for a secure connection. Screws terminals shall not be used. Cables
having the same number shall be terminated at adjacent terminals and connected by
means of cable jumpers at the terminal block. Terminal blocks shall be grouped according
to the working voltage, power circuit and control circuit. 10% of spare terminals and not
less than two numbers shall be provided on each group of terminal block.

1.4.3 All Circuit breakers, Feeders' etc. shall be provided with labels of adequate dimensions.
Labels shall be of traffolyte having a white background with engraved letters. They shall be
screw fixed on the panel.

1.5 Metering and indication:

1.5.1 The Mains supply incomer shall be provided with ammeter, a voltmeter and RYB phase
indication lamps. KWH meter shall be provided and shall be of an approved type and
make by the Utility. Ammeters and voltmeters shall be as specified elsewhere.

1.5.2 Indicating lamps shall be of the long life LED type. They shall be connected through
individually fused circuits tapped from the outgoing side of the main switch.

1.5.3 Internal and auxiliary wiring shall be of the 600/1000V grade with a minimum cross section
of 2.5-sq. mm.

1.5.4 For the generator supply incomer circuit breaker, the following meters and indication shall
be provided:

(a) Digital Ammeters
(b) Digital Voltmeter
(c) Frequency meter 45-60 Hz range
(d) Hour run meter
(e) Power factor meter
(f) kW meter
(g) Indicating lamps to indicate each phase live (red, yellow & blue).

2.0 Tests:

The panels shall undergo the following tests in the factory before despatch:

a) Primary Injection Test for all Circuit Breakers.
b) Secondary Test for all protective relays and meters, CT polarity tests.
c) Millivolt Drop Test
d) HV Test 2.5kV for 1 min.

Page 6 of 13

e) Insulation test
f) Function Test

These tests shall be carried out in presence of the Consultant.

3.0 Drawings and Information:

The vendor shall furnish following submittal after placement of order:

i) General Arrangement drawing showing front view, plan, foundation plan ,floor
cutouts and trenches for external cables , elevations, transport sections and
weights.

ii) Sectional drawings of various types of feeders, panels showing general
constructional features, mounting details of various devices, busbars, current
transformers, cable boxes, terminal boxes for control cables etc.

iii) Schematic and control wiring diagrams for each type of feeder and protection
including indicating devices, metering instruments, alarms, space heaters etc.

iv) Terminal plan showing terminal numbers, ferrule markings ,device terminal
numbers, functions etc. and

v) Control wiring diagrams.

Vendor shall provide a copy of the above drawings for approval and a copy of the as
built drawings for records.

The information furnished shall include the following:

i) Technical literature giving complete information of the equipment.

ii) Erection, Operation and maintenance manual complete with all relevant
information, drawings and literature for auxiliary equipment and accessories,
characteristics for relays etc.

iii) An equipment list with detailed specifications and make.

4.0 Auto Change Over Panel

4.1 General

The Automatic Transfer switch shall be of mechanically and electrically interlocked type
to exclude any possibility of coupling together the normal and emergency sources.

To ensure continuity of service both air circuit breakers shall have two stable position,
Closed and Open. It shall be possible to manually operate each air circuit breaker (or
unprotected circuit breaker) in the event of the absence of control voltage.

For maintenance purpose, the transfer switches shall have a neutral position with both
air circuit breakers in the Open position. It shall also be possible to lock each air circuit
breaker in the Open position.


Page 7 of 13

Each air circuit breaker (or unprotected circuit breaker) of the transfer switch shall be
equipped with auxiliary contacts and alarm contacts (Tripped status indication).

4.2 Construction

Operations of the air circuit breakers (or unprotected circuit breaker) shall be by
individual momentarily energized motor on each breaker.

The mechanical interlock for 2 air circuit breakers side by side may be achieved with two
cables.

ATS switch shall be equipped with microprocessors / PLC based controller to carry out
the following functions :

a. Switching from one source to another depending on the presence of voltage on
the transformer / generator.

b. Control of engine generating set.

c. Load shedding and reconnection of non priority circuits.

d. Switching to the generator source in the event of failure of normal source.

e. Circuit breaker status indications shall be displayed in front of the controller (On /
Off fault).

f. Test push button shall be provided on the front of the controller to check the
transfer from normal to emergency and return to normal source.

g. Controller shall be equipped with adjustment of time delays infront.

5.0 Sub Main Distribution Board:

5.1 The panel board shall be wall mounting type constructed to BS EN 61439, Form-2b Type-2
requirements. It shall be constructed of minimum 2mm thick electro-galvanised steel
coated with high solid enamel polyester electrostatic spray and oven baked. The color
shall be RAL 7032 (light grey). The degree of protection of the board shall be IP54.
Submain panel boards shall be provided with minimum 2 no. pad locks with locks and key.

5.2 Busbars shall be of hard drawn, high conductivity tinned copper and rated for continuos
operation. The phase bar, neutral bar and earth bar shall be identified by approved colour
codes. The neutral bar shall be of the same cross section as the phase bus bar. A sub feed
neutral assembly with a removable link for isolation shall be available as an integral part of
the Distribution board. Earthing bar assembly shall also be available to facilitate the
connection of earth continuity conductors.

5.3 All Circuit breakers , Metering and Busbar ratings shall be as per the load schedules and
drawings.The main MCCB and the feeder breakers shall be of appropriate capacity.

5.4 Panel wiring, Terminal blocks and labels shall be as specified for the Main Distribution
Boards.


Page 8 of 13

5.5 Tests to be conducted on the SMDB before despatch and the Drawings to be furnished
shall be the same as specified for Main Distribution Boards.

6.0 MCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

6.1 Description

6.1.1 The specification hereunder shall be applied to al panel boards referenced on the
drawings/load schedules as DB's.
The distribution board shall be flush / surface mounted split busbar type and shall be
provided with standard extension box to allow cable glanding if required. The distribution
board shall be surface mounted when installed within the electrical room/service rooms.

Distribution boards shall be provided with an isolator incomer with common ELCBs for
group of lighting circuits and common ELCBs for group of power circuits for each section
of MCBs or RCBOs for each power circuit as shown on schedules.

6.1.3 As a standard item, all MCB boards shall be provided with permanent circuit identification
charts to the approval of the engineer.

6.1.4 MCBs shall comply with IEC 898 and RCBOs shall comply with BSEN 61009. ELCBs shall
comply with BSEN 61008.

6.2 Enclosures

6.2.1 The MCB Distribution Boards shall be surface/flush mounted type. The enclosures within
Electrical rooms shall be surface mounting type. The enclosures shall be powder coated
rustproof sheet steel units, complete with circuit breakers providing thermal overload and
magnetic short-circuit and earth fault protection as shown on the drawings. The enclosure
protection shall be IP 31, while the complete assembly shall comply with IEC 439-1.

6.3 Busbar

6.3.1 The MCBs shall be mounted on either 3 phase or single phase or split busbars as
appropriate. All spaces which are not provided with breakers shall be covered with blank
plates.

6.3.2 A final sub-circuit neutral assembly and an earthing bar assembly shall be available to
facilitate the connection of neutral conductors and protective conductors respectively.

6.4 Breakers

6.4.1 Miniature circuit breakers, RCBOs and earth leakage circuit breaker and shall be provided
as indicated on the load schedules.

6.4.2 The short circuit rating for the MCBs and RCBOs shall be 10KA.

6.4.3 All circuit breakers shall be factory calibrated to ambient temperature of 50 deg.C.

7.0 Air Circuit Breakers

7.1 Air Circuit Breakers shall be designed and constructed to have a short circuit breaking
capacity of not less than 50 kA and shall comply with the latest editions of IEC 947-2 and

Page 9 of 13

BS 4752. They shall be of the fully withdrawable type and motor operated. ACB On/Off
pushbuttons with On/Off indication lamps shall be provided.

ACBs shall be 3 or 4 pole type as indicated on drawings.

7.2 Suitable automatic safety shutters shall be provided to cover live parts when the ACB is in
the withdrawn position. There shall be 3 distinct positions i.e.

"Connected"
"Test"
"Disconnected-Isolated"

There shall also be a "Withdrawn" position.

7.3 ACB's shall have adequately designed Arc chutes and Arc shields for fast and effective
Arc chopping. The protective release shall be of the solid state electronic type having
protection against overloads, short circuits and ground fault with adjustable time and
current settings. The following protections shall be included :
(a) Overload protection (LT)
(b) Short-circuit protection (ST)
(c) Instantaneous short-circuit protection (I)
(d) Ground fault protection (GF)

7.4 The ACB shall have sufficient auxiliary contacts with a minimum of 2 NO and 2 NC
contacts.

8.0 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker

8.1 Moulded case circuit breakers shall conform to the latest editions of BS 4752 and IEC 947-
2. The short circuit breaking capacities of the MCCB's installed in the main LV
switchboards shall be at least 50 kA and 35KA in SMDBs. The MCCBs used on the project
shall be of the plug-in type.

8.2 MCCB's shall be of the heavy-duty quick make break type. All MCCB's shall be ambient
temperature compensated to give the ratings indicated in the drawings at 50C for
which a formal certificate confirming that MCCB's have been temperature
compensated should be furnished. Each breaker shall have on each phase a thermal
over current release and also an instantaneous magnetic trip both of the adjustable
type. Four pole breakers shall have a common trip both with a single operating handle
and designed so that any overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open.
Breakers shall be trip free and each shall have a trip indication independent of ON or
OFF positions. To reset from the tripped position the mechanism shall first pass through
the off position. Tripped indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a
position between ON and OFF.

8.3 The MCCBs in LV MDBs and MCCs as shown on drawings shall be withdrawable type.

9.0 Disconnect Switches

9.1 Disconnect switches and isolator shall comply with IEC-947.

Page 10 of 13

9.2 Disconnect switches shall be provided at each motor controller and appliance location
. Isolators shall be rated to connect and disconnect 5 to 7 times the rated current of the
item being switched. Isolators shall have a fully visual braking characteristic. Isolator
enclosures shall be made of aluminium alloy to IP-65 and shall be provided with
padlockable handle interlocked with the door. Isolators exposed to weather shall be
housed within self-extinguished polyester loaded fiberglass panels to IP65.

10.0 Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers(ELCB's)

10.1 Current operated Earth leakage Circuit breakers shall comply with BS EN 61008.

10.2 The ELCB's shall have a residual current operated electromechanical release and shall
incorporate a filtering device to eliminate unwanted tripping due to transient voltage. A
test button is to prove operation of the ELCB.

The ELCB's shall have 100mA sensitivity for lighting circuits and 30mA for power circuits.

11.0 Contactors / Overload Relays/ Control Relays/Timers

11.1 Contactors:

Contactors shall be in conformance to IEC 947-4 / CSA 22.2 No.14 and shall be CE
approved / CSA Certified.

The magnets and contact movements of the contactor shall be horizontal. The contacts
shall be double break, butt type and each moving contact shall be individually spring
loaded. The fixed and moving contacts shall be of silver -cadmium oxide. The contactor
coils shall be continuously rated and shall be wound on moulded formers. Contactors
shall be factory calibrated, ambient temperature compensated and sealed. It shall be
possible to attach the contactors to 35mm DIN Mounting Rail (EN 50 022). Power
contactors shall be provided with a minimum of 2 NO and 2 NC Auxiliary contacts.

The contactors shall provide greater performance in less panel space. There shall be
flexibility in the selection of front mounting or side mounting of auxiliary contacts .The
contactor shall design features for IP 2LX finger protection against accidental contact
with live components, positive drive contacts and protection against manual operation,
Auxiliary and relay contacts shall be compatible with electronic circuits to 17V, 5mA.

11.2 Overload Relays

Overload relays shall confirm to IEC 947-4 /CSA C22.2 No 14 and shall be CSA certified /
CE approved.

The motor overload protection should have a protection choice of trip class 10 or 20. As
a standard, the overload relay shall offer a manually operated trip function, visible trip
indicator and isolated N.O. alarm contacts are to be used to protect motor circuits
against overloads, phase sequence, phase failure (single phasing) and under voltage
conditions. The relay range selected shall be such that the full load current of the
equipment falls well within the relay adjustment range. The energy consumption of the
relay shall be not above 150mW.

11.3 Control Relays

Page 11 of 13

Control relays shall conform to IEC 255-10-00 and shall be CSA certified.

Control relays shall be of plug in type and shall have built in LEDs. They shall have
miniature square bases with blade terminals. The contacts shall be of silver cadmium
rated for 5A continuos current. The control relays shall be suitable for wiring with spade
type crimped lugs.

11.4 Timers

Timers shall conform to IEC 255-1 and shall be CSA certified.

Timer relays with adjustable range for the Star delta starter shall ensure precise
reproducibility of the timing function. The relay shall be equipped with Single pole
double throw 1 Pole change over contact two electrically separated time delayed
contact one normally open and one normally close.

12.0 Indication lamps / Push Buttons / Selector switches.

12.1 Indicating lamps:

The Indicating lamps shall be LED type.

12.2 Push Buttons:

Push button shall be flush type with colors in accordance with BS4099. Push Buttons
contact blocks shall have double break silver plated contacts in NO / NC configuration
rated not less than 5A resistive at 240AC, 50Hz. Push Buttons shall feature a diaphragm
seal to protect the button from the entrance of oil , water and other contaminants. O-
ring seals, which rely on lubricants, shall not be used.

Start and stop push buttons shall be of shrouded type.

Emergency stop push buttons shall be of maintained contact, pull to reset and lockable
at EM-stop to prevent reset. Engraved legend plates shall be fitted with all push
buttons.

12.3 Selector switches:

Selector switches shall be positive action rotary can switches, which shall incorporate
double break contacts. Selector contacts shall be double break and of hard silver alloy.
They shall have a minimum continues current rating of 10A and be of a high breaking
capacity. The switch positions shall be marked on all engraved legend plates, which
shall be made from black, white, black traffolyte, and the minimum character size shall
be 3 mm. Operating knobs of the rotary type with lever or key operated actuators.
Hands -Off -Auto selector switch shall have three positions with center position as off.

13.0 Site condition:

Altitude : Sea level

Relative Humidity : 100%


Page 12 of 13

Design ambient temperature : 50 deg. C

Surface temperature : Solar radiation may increase surface
Temperature up to 80 deg. C.

Rainfall : 54.4 mm maximum per day.

Atmosphere : Salipherous atmosphere often containing fine
dust and pollutants in particular CO2 and H2S.

14.0 Codes and Standards:

IEC 38 Standard voltages
IEC 50 International Electro technical Vocabulary.
IEC 51 Recommendations for indicating electrical measuring instruments
IEC 59 Standard current ratings

BSEN 60947-2

IEC 947-2 Air Circuit Breaker/ Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
IEC 158 Low voltage control gear
IEC 185 Current Transformer.
IEC 186 Voltage Transformer
IEC 255 Relays
IEC 269 LV fuses with high breaking capacity.
IEC 277 Definitions for switchgear and control gear.
IEC 292 Low voltage motor starter.
IEC 337 Control switches.
IEC 341 Push button switches
IEC 408 Low voltage air break switches, air break disconnectors, air break switch
disconnectors and fuse combination units.
IEC 439-1 Factory built assemblies of low voltage switchgear and controlgear

BS EN 61439-1

IEC 445 Identification of equipment terminals and of termination of certain
conductors, including general rules of alphanumeric system.
IEC 446 Identification of insulated and bare conductor by colors
IEC 529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures.
IEC 898 Miniature Circuit Breaker.

(The equivalent British standards for the above IEC specifications
shall also apply)

15.0 VOLT METER AND AMMETER

15.1 Volt meters and ammeter used throughout the project shall be of the digital type and shall
be fitted into the front of the panels.

15.2 The meters shall have a dielectric strength of 2KV at 50Hz for 1 minute with 7 segments light
emitting diode displays and the figure height shall be 20mm.


Page 13 of 13

15.3 Meters shall have 4 digits display and shall have an accuracy of 1% or better.

16.0 SWITCHBOARD OPERATOR'S MAT

16.1 All electrical switch cupboards and plantroom switchboard shall be provided with a 1M
wide carbon free rubber mat or mats, having a ribbed upper surface and being of such
length to suit the full operating extent of each switchboard.

16.2 The insulating mats shall each be certified to have sustained, without failure, a one minute
voltage test at 2 KV.

17.0 COORDINATION

Complete co-ordination study of the distribution shall be carried out to establish tripping
time of breakers at the different levels. Breakers shall be upgraded, if required based on
the study, to achieve proper co-ordination without any cost to the Client. The co-
ordination study and short circuit calculations of the complete distribution shall be
submitted for the approval of the Engineer.

18.0 ENERGY MONITORING UNIT

Digital energy monitoring unit with MODBUS or equivalent communication capabilities shall
be provided in each main LV Panel and as shown on drawings and shall be integrated
with BMS.

19.0 THERMAL IMAGING

Thermal imaging shall be carried out on LV switchgear panel, busbars, bus joints, busbar
connection points, tap-off units, etc. before handing over and at the end of
maintenance period.

VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

Page 1 of 6

SECTION 5



Page 2 of 6

SECTION 5


INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 SPECIFICATIONS

3.0 INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TEST


Page 3 of 6

1.0 GENERAL

This Specification describes the requirements for the 400V Variable Frequency Drive
Controllers (VFD). The 400V Variable Frequency Drive Controllers shall be designed and
provided in accordance with this Specification and the attached data sheets. The
proposed Manufacturers installation requirements should be complied by the
Manufacturers as part of the Contract including shielded power cables (if required),
enclosure for VFDs, earthing requirements, etc to achieve EMC Compatible installation. All
details shall be furnished as part of the submittal.

All equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest
edition of the applicable:

NFPA 70
IEC 146
EN Standard / CE marked for EMC directives:
Emissions Immunity
EN 50081-1 EN 50082-1
EN 50081-2 EN 50082-2
EN 55011 Class A IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8
EN 55011 Class B EN 50178

EN 60204-1

The manufacturer shall furnish the product as listed and classified by underwriters
laboratories as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

The VFD product line shall be capable of operating normally in an environment with an
ambient temperature range of 0 C to 50 C with a relative humidity of up to 95%
(non-condensing). The enclosed current rating shall be derated by 10% for each 5 C
above 50 C not exceeding 60 C.

The product line shall be capable of being shipped and stored in an environment with an
ambient temperature range of 0 C to 65 C.

The nominal operating altitude shall be less than 1000 m above sea level.

Ship controllers in convenient sections crated and protected, bearing in mind the hazards
of transportation.

All necessary bus connections, wire jumpers, bolts, nuts, etc. shall be suitably packed and
identified to facilitate field assembly.

2.0 SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 The variable speed drive controllers technical requirements shall be in accordance with
the data sheets. Seller shall be responsible for ensuring that under all operating conditions:


Page 4 of 6

- The controllers and their characteristics shall be compatible with their respective
driven production motor and the plant control system. Seller shall obtain speed
(frequency) range required and maximum frequency permitted for each type of
controller from the load equipment supplier.

- The VFD shall be suitable for use with high efficiency Design B, 400 V motors.

- The total harmonic distortion (THD) voltage in the plant electrical and local DEWA
systems shall not exceed 5% and no individual harmonic shall exceed 3% during
normal plant operation.

- Computerised harmonic analysis studies to IEEE Standard 519; copies of the studies
shall be provided with the proposal.

- The VFD shall be fully digital pulse width modulated type (PWM) using latest
generation IGBTs with isolating contactors and line reactors.

2.2 The VFD controllers shall be suitable for operation on 400 Volt 15%, 3 phase, 50 Hz input
power supply and 0-400 Volt, 3 phase, 0.5 to 400 Hz output. No transformer shall be used
on either the input or output of the VFD.

2.3 Each controller shall comprise:

- Enclosure with filters and gaskets construction, mounted on steel sills.
- Incoming supply terminals complete with cable lugs.
- Padlockable line disconnect switch with bolt on HRC fuses in each phase.
- 110% overload capacity above motor service factor demand (115%) for 30
minutes.
- Short circuit and current limit protection.
- Surge (TVSS) protection.
- Stop/Start contactor to ensure when the motor is not running, no voltage is present
on the motor power terminals.
- Wireways with removable gland plates.
- Incoming power system isolation transformer, if required, with thermal sensing in
each phase, and filters to limit on the plant 400V bus THD to 5%; no single harmonic
to be more than 3%.
- Drive operation man machine interface (MMI) keyboard.
- Stepless non reversing minimum and maximum motor speed adjustments,
adjustable ramp up rates, minimum/maximum speed limits for pump motors.
Adjustments to be password protected.
- Man/Auto select switch via keypad, with locking via password in both positions
(see Note).
- Local/Remote selector switch via keypad with locking via password in both
positions (see Note).
- Drive Ready with remote signal.
- Stop and start pushbuttons via keypad, in remote mode.
- Speed control: Local/Remote/Automatic via keypad.
- Motor speed indication via LED display.
- Motor On/Off indication via LED display.
- Emergency stop pushbutton, local at controller and local to plant.
- Drive status and failure diagnostic feature via LED display. Feature to log, time and
date the last 30 fault conditions.
- Indication of output to drive current on each phase.

Page 5 of 6

- Isolated I/O control signals.
- Motor multi-function protection, providing short circuit (51), overvoltage (59),
undervoltage (27), thermal (49), stalling (49S) and phase unbalance (46)
protections, complete with ground fault (51G) protection device to trip the
incoming supply.
- Bolted and shrouded bolted type terminals for terminating load cables.
- Weidmuller or Wieland type terminal blocks shall be provided to connection of
external wiring and cables.
- Interposing relays as required.
- 110V AC control voltage or manufacturers standard.
- Microprocessor based electronic self-diagnostics and fault detection system.
- Each cubicle shall be provided with a earthing bus, complete with two connectors
for connecting to the plant earthing system. Drilled holes shall be provided for
connecting cable earth conductor.
- VFD controllers shall be provided with a lamacoid engraved nameplate, minimum
size 150mm x 75mm, engraving details to be provided by Purchaser.
- The VFD shall have built-in ventilation fan and dust filter. The controller to be
remote mounted at front door for manual adjustments and monitoring of
parameters.
- The VFD shall have thermal cut-off provision for the motor over temperature.

In Man mode, two modes shall be functional: Local or Remote. In Local mode, motor
shall be started from Start/Stop pushbuttons via controllers keypad. In Remote mode,
motor shall be started from pushbutton station located near motor (if required).

2.4 Performance

The VFD shall have the following features as a minimum:

- Minimum efficiency of 97% at maximum load and speed.
- Minimum line side displacement power factor of 0.95 to 1.0 logging at all speeds
and loads.
- Adjustable motor frequency of 0 to 400 Hz.
- Separately adjustable acceleration and deceleration ramps from 0 to 999
seconds.
- Rotating motor restart feature.
- Capable of running without a motor connected for set-up and testing.
- Skip frequency reject point to prevent operating of the equipment at a resonant
speed.
- Ride through for power outage of at least 2 seconds duration
- Load loss detection
- Overload protection
- Auto economizer
- The flying start feature operable with or without encoder feedback

2.5 Discrete Operation

Inputs

- Start
- Stop

Outputs

Page 6 of 6

- Ready to start
- Running
- VFD general fault alarm status
- VFD Auto and Man/Local/Remote operation status

2.6 Analog Operation

Inputs

- Speed control signal

Outputs

- Speed signal feedback
- Phase currents (percent)
- Frequency (percent)

2.7 Verification of Interface

- Vendor shall demonstrate functional testing and operational verification of the
control interface with the Building Management System via Modbus, Bacnet, LON,
or equal as required.

3.0 INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TEST

Controllers shall be inspected at all stage of manufacture in accordance with the Sellers
Quality Assurance Program and shall be completely assembled in the works. Seller shall
provide a production schedule, which shall give details of the production processes. Seller
shall provide a QA

Manual, which shall detail the inspections, testing to referenced standards, and burn in at
full load at an ambient of 50 C, for a minimum of 8 hours. All deficiencies shall be
corrected before shipment.

All metal surfaces that are to be painted or coated shall be cleaned to an equal of a
commercial finish as defined in the Steel Structures Painting Councils manual -
SSPC-SP6-63, modified to exclude wet sandblasting and painted to manufacturers
standard finish. Internal surfaces shall be painted white.

Nameplates shall be provided for each VFD controller.

MOTOR CONTROL CENTRE

Page 1 of 7

SECTION 6


Page 2 of 7

SECTION 6


Index

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 SPECIFICATIONS

3.0 INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TESTS


Page 3 of 7

1 GENERAL

GENERAL INTRODUCTION

This Specification describes the requirements for 400 V motor control centres (MCC). The
motor control centres shall be designed and provided in accordance with this
Specification and the electrical schematic diagram.

The scope of supply includes the design, manufacture, installation, testing and
commisioning of the 400 V motor control centres as described above.

Equipment unloading and storage at the Job Site.

All equipment shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the
applicable IEC 439-1, EN 61439-1 form-3b, or form as shown as drawings, IEC 947-4, IEC
801 standards and shall meet the requirements of DEWA.

Dedicated MCCs as mentioned on drawings for pumps shall be form-2, type-2 with
incomer MCCB (N/A) / Isolator.

All MCCs shall be weather proof to IP-54.

Subject to compliance with the requirements of the contract documents, acceptable
manufacturer of all materials specified in this section of types and sizes required, whose
products have been in satisfactory use under similar servicer conditions for not less than
five years.

The Motor Control Centres shall be capable of operating normally in an environment
with an ambient temperature range of 0C to 50C with relative humidity of up to 95%
(non-condensing). The enclosed current rating shall be derated by 10% for each 5C
above 50C not exceeding 60C.

The MCC shall be capable of being shipped and stored in an environment with an
ambient temperature range of 0C to 65C.

The normal operating altitude shall be less than 1000 m above sea level.

2 Specifications

The MCC technical requirements shall be in accordance with the data sheets,
single line diagrams and schematics

The motor control centres shall be suitable for operation on 400 V, 3-phase, 3 wire,
50 Hz, front mounted, installed on steel channel sills.

All power bus bars as well as all other current carrying parts shall be of copper.
The main horizontal bus bars shall be insulated and isolated, and rated as
indicated in single line diagrams, and shall run continuously the entire length of the
control centre, except when it may be necessary to cut and provide splice plates
as between shipping sections. The main bus shall be housed in an isolated
compartment. Vertical bus bars extending the full height of each section shall be
provided. The vertical bus shall be insulated with flame-retardant material. All

Page 4 of 7

buses shall be braced for 50,000 symmetrical amps RMS short circuit current. All
bus assemblies shall be supported by steel framework with insulators of moulded
glass polyester. Provision shall be made to extend MCC on either side.

Motor control centres shall have a continuous horizontal copper earthing bus
installed in the bottom of the MCC. It shall extend through each section of the
control centre and shall be provided with compression lugs at each end. Vertical
ground bus extending down each vertical section shall also be provided.

Incoming sections shall have top entry. Space shall be adequate to
accommodate incoming bus ducts supplied by others. MCC Supplier shall
coordinate with the main contractor regarding details of bus ducts.

Outgoing power and control wiring shall be from top.

Each control centre shall be provided with a laminated phenolic nameplate,
white outer layers with black centre layer, 75 mm x 200 mm, with bevelled edges.
Lettering shall be engraved into the phenolic to produce black letters on a white
background. The MCC number shall be in 25 mm high letters and numerals. All
other lettering shall be a minimum of 10 mm high. Tabreed equipment and
purchase number shall be engraved on the nameplate. The nameplates shall be
firmly fixed to the MCCs.

Vertical Sections

- Each motor control centre shall consist of one or more rigid free standing
vertical section(s) bolted together to form a unit assembly.

- Sections shall be suitable for mounting starters in front of the section.
-
- Vertical sections shall be front connected and be capable of being wired
from the front without removing any units. Adequate vertical wiring
space accessible from the front shall be provided in a separate vertical
isolated wireway, with covers.
-
- Openings, covered by removable gasketted plates, shall be provided in
ends of vertical sections to allow for future addition of vertical sections at
either end. Removable plates shall also be used to cover the top and
any unused space on the front and back of the control centres. Where
called for in specific requirements, space shall be provided for
installation of future units. This space shall be complete with bus, unit
supports and isolating barriers.

Unit Compartments

Each control unit shall be designed for mounting within a vertical section in such a
manner that each unit will be completely enclosed and isolated from all other
units. Adequate space shall be provided for entry of wiring from the vertical wiring
trough. Control units shall be plug in type construction, equipped with self-
aligning stabs of a type that will increase contact pressure on short circuits.

Control units shall be capable of independently and satisfactorily clearing a fault
on the load side of the starter with 42,000 symmetrical amperes available at the
line side terminals.

Page 5 of 7

Each unit compartment shall be provided with an individual front door. Starters
and feeder unit doors shall be interlocked mechanically with the unit disconnect
device to prevent unintentional opening of the door with power on and
unintentional application of power while the door is open.
Means shall be provided for releasing the interlock for intentional application of
power, if desired, while the door is open. Padlocking arrangements shall permit
locking of the disconnect device in the OFF position with a maximum of 3
padlocks with the door closed or open.

Starter disconnect devices shall be operable from outside the enclosure and shall
show position of disconnect device whether compartment door is opened or
closed.

Similar nameplates showing unit location I.D. shall be installed at left top corner of
front door of each unit.

Special tools and equipment shall be provided for operation and maintenance
purposes.

STARTERS, DISCONNECT AND ACESSORIES

Motor starters shall be in accordance with this specification. The maximum starting
currents for motors shall be:

- Less then 10 hp 5 times full load current

- 10 hp to 50 hp -2 times full load current

- 50 hp and above -1.5 times full load current

The stationary equipment shall be as follows:

Motors up to 10 hp will be connected Across-The-Line with over current protection

Motors 10 hp and above shall be controlled with motor starters of a soft start
design.

Provide moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) for feeders with current limiting
protection as indicated on single line diagrams. The rating of the MCCBs shall be
in accordance with the load indicated on the single line diagrams with a minimum
of 65kA interrupting capacity.

ACROSS-THE-LINE STARTING

Controllers shall be of circuit breaker combination type with full voltage magnetic
starters for across-the-line starting. Full protection of each phase shall be provided
in starters by means of electronic overloads.

Undervoltage protection shall be provided by the starter coil to disengage on 65%
of rated voltage unless otherwise noted.


Page 6 of 7

ELECTRONIC OVERLOAD RELAY

Vendor shall provide an electronic overload relay for connecting the starter.

The overload relay shall have a current adjustment range of 5:1 or greater.

The overload relay shall have +/- 2.5% setting accuracy.

The overload relay can be converted from manual to automatic reset.

The overload relay trips in two seconds or less under phase loss conditions when
applied to fully loaded motor.

The overload relay provides a visible trip indicator.

The overload relay provides led status indication.

The trip indication LED flashed in a pattern that indicates the trip cause.

The overload relay provides 1 N.C. auxiliary contact.

The overload relay provides a test trip function that when operated trips both the
N.C. contacts and the N.O. triac outputs.

The overload relay has trip free construction

The overload relay is ambient temperature compensated

The overload relay has user selectable 10, 15, 20 or 30 tripping classes

The overload relay has user selectable jam/stall protection.

The overload relay has user selectable ground fault protection.

The overload relay is compatible with a hand-held or panel-mounted interface
device that provides a two-line Bakelite LCD and start, stop and reset control
functions.

The overload relay can communicate on an open communications bus.

The overload relay provides the following information on a communication
network.

- Average Current

- Percent Phase Imbalance

- Percent Thermal Capacity Used

- Trip Cause

- Full load Current Setting

- Output Triac Status

Page 7 of 7

The overload relay provides two triac outputs that enable the overload to control
two starter coils.

The overload relay provides the following control functions on a communication
network.

- Start
- Stop
- Reset

Variable Frequency Drives

Vendor shall provide variable frequency drives (VFD) for applications that require
varying the speed of squirrel cage motors as indicated on single line diagrams.

The VFD shall be as detailed in Section 5.

Power Correction Capacitors

Refer Section 7 for details.

3 INSPECTIONS AND FACTORY TESTS

MCCs shall be inspected at each stage of manufacture in accordance with the
Vendors quality assurance program and shall be completely assembled in the
works. All deficiencies shall be corrected before shipment. Seller shall advise the
Consultant 5 (five) working days before completion and before testing
commences to Consultant, if required, to make arrangements to witness the
inspection(s) and tests.

MCCs shall be tested in the manufacturers works in accordance with the
referenced standards. Tests to include:

- Routine functional tests.
- Insulation (Megger) and hi-pot of wiring.

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS,
REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 7

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMONIC FILTERS


Page 2 of 4

SECTION 7

POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
CAPACITORS, REGULATORS AND HARMANIC FILTERS

INDEX

1.0 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS & REGULATORS

2.0 HARMONIC FILTERS, SURGE ARRESTORS

3.0 HARMONIC ANALYSIS


Page 3 of 4

1.0 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS & REGULATORS

These shall be provided as per DEWA requirements.

The power factor correction capacitor shall comply with the relevant BS and IEC
Standard and shall be double insulated dry type with self healing metalized
polypropylene film dielectric with low losses to IP 545 and shall incorporate a discharge
resistance and harmonic filters. An overpressure disconnector switch shall be fitted on
each capacitor as an additional safety measure. Capacitors shall have aluminium
housing and be detuned to below 3
rd
harmonics.

Capacitance variation due to ambient temperature shall be taken into consideration
and the capacitors shall be derated to give the required capacitance at 50 deg. C.

Capacitors shall be protected by circuit-breakers and wired through cables with
capacity of 1.6 times the capacitor rating.

Where multi steps capacitor bank is used the power factor shall be maintained at a set
value indicated by the reactive power regulator which shall control the opening and
closing of the capacitor switching contactors. Number of capacitors to be connected
through the regulator, in the event of Power failure or when the Power is restored, shall
be in accordance with the System reactive power.

The high inrush current due to capacitor switching shall be taken into consideration by
using fast acting contactor designed for capacitor switching and which shall be able to
handle 100 times the rated current. In addition to that, the cable connecting the
contactor to the busbar shall be installed in a way that self inductance is produced e.g.
by coiling the cable into necessary number of loops along the cable run.

Capacitor shall be designed and constructed to with stand any harmonic currents if
existing and additional filters shall be provided to withstand harmonic currents.

The capacitor panel supply shall be by means of isolating switch with door interlocking
device. Each bank of capacitors shall be controlled by its own contactor , sized for the
capacitive load and a set of three HRC fuses . Choke coils shall be provided which
protect the capacitor banks from switch on inrush currents. The electronic regulator,
indicator lamps for mains on, banks on, auxiliary circuits on, Auto-Off- manual switches
for each bank shall be mounted on the front of the panel.

Capacitors shall meet the requirements of EN 60831-1/2 and its reliability shall be
recognized by the mark UL810. Capacitors shall generally be of cylindrical aluminium
case equipped with M12 bottom fixing stud. Capacitors shall be fixed with overpressure
disconnector and discharge resistor. Temperature category: -25/+50 deg. celcius. PCB
dielectrics shall not be used.

An Electronic regulator shall be provided to control the switching on and off of the banks
of capacitors. It shall work with a current signal 0.5 and 5Amps and return to zero for
absence in voltage. It should be equipped with display facilities for Volts, amp on the CT
secondary and power factor.

Capacitors shall shut off incase of generator operation.


Page 4 of 4

2.0 HARMONIC FILTERS AND SURGE ARRESTORS

Surge Arrestors shall be provided for each Main LV MDB panels.

The harmonic levels as specified for harmonics generating equipment like VFDs, UPS
etc. shall be complied with. Total harmonic level in the system shall not exceed 5% of
the system voltage.

Harmonic in the system shall be analysed by Contractor after energizing and switching
on the loads. If active filters are required, Contractor shall submit three proposals within
prices which shall be considered as an additional cost under PC sum.

Harmonic study shall be included as part of the contract.

3.0 HARMONIC ANALYSIS

An harmonic analysis shall be performed based on an approximation method for
evaluating total harmonic distortion (THD) voltage at the point of common coupling
(PCC), defined to be on the secondary side of the utility supply transformer. The analysis
shall take into account other devices connect on the same mains network.

In installation where harmonic current may affect sensitive equipment, the AC Drive
manufactured shall provide an automatic adaptable harmonics compensator to cope
with permanent modification of harmonic contents.

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL PART B -SECTION 8
CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER,
FITTINGS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT
Page 1 of 7

SECTION 8

CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS
AND CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Page 2 of 7

SECTION 8

CONDUITS/TRUNKING/CABLE TRAYS LADDER, FITTINGS
AND CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES

2.0 FLEXIBLE CONDUITS

3.0 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

4.0 GENERAL WIRING TRUNKING

5.0 CABLE TRAYS/CABLE LADDERS

6.0 DADO TRUNKING / SKIRTING TRUNKING

7.0 SERVICE OUTLET BOXES

8.0 WIRE BASKETS

Page 3 of 7

1.0 CONDUITS AND ACCESSORIES

All conduits embedded in concrete, plaster and screed unless otherwise specified shall be
extra heavy wall black PVC and shall conform to BS 4607. All exposed conduits shall be
heavy gauge, welded, screwed and galvanized steel in accordance with BS 4508.

PVC Conduits shall be black of the extra heavy wall with 1.8mm minimum thickness for
20mm dia conduit.

Steel conduits shall be of the heavy gauge galvanized steel, welded and screwed type
zinc coated, hot dipped galvanized both inside and outside.

All set, fixing and wood screws used throughout the installation shall be brass.

Accessories mounting box shall be provided with brass earth terminal and shall be supplied
with adjustable steel grids.

Conduit boxes for steel conduit systems shall be malleable iron with screwed spout outlets,
blind cover fixing holes, galvanized and water proof with external lugs where required.

Each steel conduit thread shall be given a coat of aluminium paint upon completion of
conduit installation.

All circular PVC boxes where used to support lighting fittings shall be provided with steel
insert clips.

The sizes of the conduits for all wiring shall be in accordance to IEE regulations and DEWA
Standards and shall be such that a cable can be withdrawn and another drawn in without
disturbing the remainder. However, the size of the conduit shall not be less than 20mm
where used for lighting and power circuits and 25mm for telephone / data wiring.

2.0 FLEXIBLE GI CONDUITS

PVC sheathed and watertight Flexible metal conduits, shall be provided between the
conduit system and electrical motors or other apparatus subject to vibration. They shall be
complete with brass double female adaptors and will be soldered to either end of all
flexible conduits and connected to solid conduit entries using smooth bore male brass
bushes.
Earth continuity through flexible conduits shall be provided by a separate earth continuity
conductor, sized in accordance with BS Standards. The brass adaptor specified above
shall be drilled so that the earth wire can be brought out at each end. The earth wire shall
be soldered at each end to the brass adaptors or alternatively connected to a substantial
earth terminal.
3.0 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

All joints in PVC conduits, other than screwed joints, shall be cemented with a waterproof
adhesive. This adhesive shall be as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

Screwed connections between steel conduits and accessories shall be screwed up tight,
where coupled by a socket the conduit ends shall butt together; running joints shall be
provided with back nuts which shall be screwed up tight.

PVC conduits shall be saddled at a minimum of 1 metre intervals. All saddles, tubes and
boxes must be in perfect alignment to avoid any appearance of warping when the
Page 4 of 7

installation is complete. Saddles should not be so tight as to prevent expansion of the
conduit.

Steel conduits run on the surface shall be secured with galvanized saddles spaced not
more than 2 metres apart.

All saddles for steel conduits shall be of the distance type. Spacer bar type saddles will
NOT be permitted.

All ceiling boxes concealed in ceiling slabs or voids above false ceilings shall finish flush with
the underside of the ceiling and all necessary extension or break joint rings shall be
provided and fitted.

Steel conduits which finish at boxes or other equipment without smooth bore spouts shall
be fitted with smooth bore bushes, the inside diameter of which shall be equal to the bore
of the conduit. The junction shall be made by means of a male to female threaded socket
bearing on the outside of the box and into which shall be screwed from the inside of the
box a hexagon smooth bore male bush.

Plain or inspection elbows, or tees, will not be permitted and the number and position of
boxes and sizes of conduits shall be arranged to permit the cable being drawn-in easily
after all conduits have been erected. Stock bends below 38 mm diameter will not be
allowed; all such bends shall be formed out of the conduit at Site to suit the local
conditions. Sets and bends shall be made without indentation and the bore shall remain
full and free throughout.

Conduits shall not be run closer than 0.15m to any steam or hot water pipes and shall be
run underneath such pipes rather than over them. The conduits shall not be run closer than
0.05m to any telephone, bell or other signalling circuit.

No wiring or drawn-in wires, cables or wires of any description are to be drawn into the
conduits until the section of the conduit system involved is complete.

A separate conduit and wiring system is to be provided for each installation i.e. lighting
general purpose sockets, power, telephone, etc.

Drawn-in boxes must be provided to give access to all conduit for the drawing-in or out of
any cable after the installation is completed and should not be spaced more than 9m on
straight runs. On runs with not more than two right angle bends the spacing between
draw-in boxes shall not exceed 7m.

Not more than two right angle bends shall be installed between boxes. Conduits shall not
be laid to falls, but the Contractor shall exercise care to ensure that no pockets are formed
within the conduit system in which water can collect. Drainage holes shall not be
provided.

In floors which are in direct contact with the earth or under which unheated foundation
voids are situated, conduits shall not be laid to form traps in which moisture can collect.
Where it is impossible to arrange for drainage to a lower level such floors shall be avoided
altogether and the conduit shall be run in the floor above with drops to socket outlets and
other low level points.

Embedded conduits shall be fixed in position by crumpets or such other means of fixing as
shall be necessary to ensure that they remain rigidly in structure or finishes.
Page 5 of 7

Where steel conduits enter sheet steel wiring trunking, iron clad gear or junction or similar
boxes, the junction shall be made by means of a flanged coupling with lead washer
bearing on the outside of the box and into which shall be screwed from the inside of the
box a hexagon smooth bore brass male bush of heavy pattern.

Where PVC conduits connects to any sheet steel wiring trunking, steel clad switchgear and
the like, these shall be connected to the PVC conduit system with female thread to plain
push-in adaptors with a male bush or with male thread to plain push-in adaptors with
locking ring as may be required.

Steel conduits which do not finish at boxes with smooth radiused inside spouts shall be
fitted with smooth bore bushes, the inside diameter of which shall be equal to the bore of
the conduit.

Where conduits cross a building expansion joint due allowance shall be made in the
design of the run with an approved expansion joint.

All screwed joints for conduits and fittings erected in the open air, damp situations and
plant room shall be made water-tight by the application of a suitable metallic paint and
conduit boxes being fitted with rubber gasket. Separate earth continuity conductors will
be installed within the normal circuit wiring.

The conduit system shall be such that 'cross-overs' are reduced to a minimum and runs shall
be located to avoid holes in the floor slabs required for other services.

Particular care shall be taken to ensure that no grout or other foreign materials enters the
conduit system through joints, or through surface openings. Screw holes in boxes must be
kept entirely free and clean. After screeding, compressed air is to be blown through the
conduit system to ensure that it is clean and a steel draw wire of adequate size to be
pulled through to ascertain that no obstruction is adhering to the inside of the conduits.

Draw wires shall be left in all conduit runs for other services not included in the contract.

4.0 GENERAL WIRING TRUNKING

Cable trunking, ducting and fittings should comply with BS 4678 Standards. All cable
trunking accessories such as bends, tees, cable retainer, cable separators, reducer and
support shall be supplied from the manufacturers standard product range. Site fabricated
accessories shall not be acceptable.

Cable trunking shall be of sheet steel fabrication, galvanized to with heavy protection both
inside and outside. The access plate of the trunking shall be removable in easily-handled
sections over the entire length of straight runs. Overlapping collar sections or other similar
approved linking arrangement shall be provided at the junction of the various sections of
the trunking.

All fixings shall be so arranged that there are no projecting screw threads or similar points
within the trunking which may cause damage to the cables. The section of the trunking
shall not be so changed at deviations from the straight as to decrease the cross- sectional
area.

Positive continuity links shall be supplied and fixed at all trunking section interconnection
points.
Page 6 of 7

Cable trunking shall not be installed to expose to other mechanical stress except the loads
associated in carrying cables.

Spacing of supports for cable trunking shall be as recommended by the standards,
supports shall be positioned within 300 mm of each bend or fittings.

A calculation for the space factor shall be forwarded for approval and the trunking shall
be sized accordingly.

5.0 CABLE TRAYS/CABLE LADDERS

Cable tray and cable ladder shall be produced to BS 729 and shall be hot dip galvanized.

Prefabricated mild steel cable trays shall be constructed of steel and finished hot dipped
galvanized. All trays supporting power cables shall be folded edge heavy duty tray with
return flange and those supporting fire alarm and telephone cables shall be medium duty.

Sheet steel thickness for cable trays shall be as indicated hereunder for the different sizes
and types:

- Heavy Duty : 100mm to 300mm 1.5mm
450mm to 600mm 2.0mm
Cable trays, bends and junctions shall be provided as necessary and shall be similar type
and finish. The trays shall be of adequate widths to support the necessary cables. They
shall be adequately supported throughout the length or run at intervals not exceeding
1200 mm. All cables shall be fixed to the cable tray utilising cable ties. Ventilated covers
shall be provided for all cable trays exposed to direct sunlight.

Cable ladder shall be produced of 2mm hot dipped galvanized mild steel.

Only 40% of the cable tray and the cable ladder space shall be occupied. Cable tray size
calculations shall be forwarded for approval and the tray size shall be increased, if
required, to meet the above without any extra cost.

6.0 SKIRTING / DADO TRUNKING
The trunking shall be provided as per the requirements of BS 4678 partly and BS 4662. The
uPVC trunking shall be either installed skirting level or DADO level as shown on drawings.
The system shall comply with all relevant requirements of 16
th
edition of wiring regulations
and structured cabling Standards.
All corridors, extension corridors, covers, and cable dividers shall be extruded. Corners,
corner covers, stop ends cover seals and accessory boxes must be formed by injection
moulding.

It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide a proper arrangement and installation
of the system to engineers requirements and all necessary interconnecting junction
boxes, risers, joints etc to be provided.

The trunking cover shall be uPVC to incorporate all outlets.
Sizes of Trunking shall be as shown on drawings with two / three compartments, for
power and voice / data.
Sockets shall be from the same manufacturer of trunking flush with the cover. Voice
data outlets shall be supplied under structured cabling contract. Back box and face
plate shall be provided by the skirting system vendor.
Page 7 of 7

Backboxes shall be provided as required for conduit drops.
Refer detailed specifications in Medical Services Installation (Part A Section 10) for
service panels / bed head units.

7.0 SERVICE OUTLET BOX

Service outlet boxes shall be two-compartment type of the size 300x 300 x75-90mm
and shall be constructed from high-pressure Zinc Alloy die casting base frame pillars.
This shall be fixed on to heavy gauge galvanized steel base plate for support by
support frame. Other materials adequate in strength and performance shall be
used and these shall be protected against corrosion. The boxes shall be constructed
with provisions for ducting or conduit access on all four sides. Unwanted entries shall
be blanked off with detachable side blanks.

Covers for service outlet boxes shall be made of high pressure Zinc Alloy die casting
with 12mm recess to receive ceramic tiles or carpet tiles. They shall be lifted by
suction cups as and when required giving access at all times to the power,
telephone and ELV outlets. Counter sunk screws shall secure the covers of service
boxes. All exposed portions of the boxes shall be epoxy coated in grey color.

All boxes shall have extra wide gaskets in order to minimize water seepage. Gaskets
shall be made of material that is durable in order to withstand loads.

All boxes shall be adjustable in height to take account of difference in floor
thickness.

Cables emerging from service boxes shall be protected against damage by means
of nylon cable exit grommets or equivalent and approved material and shall be
reversible to close position when not in use.

Circuit protective conductors shall be provided between the covers and the boxes.

The boxes shall be adequate in strength to take in a ceramic tile, and withstand
loads normally seen in airports and pubic locations.

8.0 STEEL WIRE BASKETS
Baskets shall be constructed from 5mm steel wires. The spacing between longitudinal
wires shall be 50mm and between transverse wires 100mm. The steel wires shall be
welded at all joints. Transverse wires shall be T welded to top edge longitudinal wires in
such a way so as to minimise fraying of the cables when being laid.
The steel wire baskets shall be Electro-Zinc galvanized and corrosion resistant.
Wire baskets shall be minimum 50mm high and, 150mm / 200mm / 300mm / 400mm /
wide as may be specified elsewhere or as shown in layout drawings.
INSTALLATION
Steel wire baskets shall be installed as shown in layout drawings as per manufacturers
instructions. Installation shall be carried out only after obtaining approval of
representative samples of baskets & accessories from the Engineer.

Purpose made accessories such as couplers, brackets & supports, fittings, dividers &
covers as may be specified else where, only shall be used for the installation of wire
baskets. All accessories shall be so constructed so as to permit easy and quick assembly
and installation.
Equipotential earth bonding shall be carried out as per manufacturers
recommendations.
SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 1 of 8

SECTION 9

SYSTEM OF WIRING
SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 2 of 8

SECTION 9

SYSTEM OF WIRING

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 TEMPORARY WIRING

3.0 CABLE

4.0 CABLE INSTALLATION

5.0 FLEXIBLE FIRE RESISTANT CABLES

SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 3 of 8

1.0 GENERAL

Unless otherwise specified all wires and cables enclosed in conduits or trunking or the like,
shall be single core LSF insulated 450/750/V grade and the installation shall be carried out
on the looping-in system with continuous mains throughout each circuit. All connections to
fittings and the like shall be of a solid nature and small connectors (other than porcelain
enclosed heavy brass sleeves) will not be allowed. Porcelain connectors enclosing heavy
brass sleeves shall be provided for heat resisting trails for enclosed fittings and for the drops
for pendant type fittings.

All connections to flexible cords or cables shall be such that any strain on the cord or cable
is not transmitted to the connections.

All wires/cables connections to switches, socket, circuit breaker etc. shall be carried out
using suitable swivel lugs or cable ends.

Joints in the PVC wiring cables will not be allowed in any part of the system

The number of cables run in conduits shall be in accordance with the IEC wiring
regulations and DEWA Regulations. With the exception of 3 phase power points or sub
main supply circuits to 3 phase boards the circuits grouped in any one conduit shall be
connected to one phase of the system only. This does not apply to wiring run in metal
trunking.

All switch wires for lighting circuits shall be on the 'live' side.

When drawing the wires and cables into the conduits or trunking, the Contractor must see
that proper appliances are used so that the wires and cables suffer no damage whatever
in the process. All kinks must be rigidly avoided and care must be taken to ensure that the
insulation, taping and brading of the cables receive no damage or abrasion.

During the progress of work or at completion, the engineer may require certain wires and
cables to be drawn out in order to test that the conditions mentioned have been
complied with. They may require that certain fittings and/or accessories be dismantled for
examination of workmanship and quality.

The final subcircuit connection and wiring shall be carried out in accordance with DEWA
regulations and unless otherwise indicated, the following details shall apply throughout the
works :-

a) Lighting Circuits up to 1000 Watts:

10 amp MCB protection Wired with 3 x 4.0mm2 LSF / SC cables.

b) Lighting Circuits 1200 to 1800 watts:

15 amp MCB protection Wired with 3 x 4.0mm2 LSF / SC cables.

c) 13 amp socket outlets:

20 amp MCB protection on radial main basis wired with 3x4 mm2 LSF / SC cable
shall be provided for upto four socket outlets serving one room only of less than 50
Sq. meters floor area.
SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 4 of 8

32 amp MCB protection on ring main basis wired with 4 x 4mm2 and 2 x 4mm2 LSF /
SC cables shall be provided for maximum 8 nos. 13 A sockets.

d) Fixed Medical Equipment.

20 amp MCB protection Wired with 2 x 4mm2 and 1 x 4mm2 LSF / SC cables.

e) Fan coil units each / VAV Units.

20 amp MCB protection wired with 2 x 4mm2 and 1 x 4mm2 LSF / SC cables.

The above details for connections shall apply throughout the Works, except where the
related Regulations would be contravened in respect of permissible voltage drop. In such
cases the contractor shall utilize a larger conductor size as appropriate.

2.0 TEMPORARY WIRING

No part of the new installations shall be connected temporarily to the Supply Authority's
mains without the approval of the Engineer and the Authority.

All temporary lighting and electric wiring which the Contractor may require, must be
provided by the Contractor who will be responsible for all charges for electricity consumed
as stated in the Contract conditions.

Temporary wiring and connections executed by the contractor to the instructions of the
Engineer shall be arranged in accordance with the IEE regulations. Where the ambient air
temperature is in excess of 50 deg.C. heat resisting silicon rubber cables shall be used for
temporary connection. Where such cables may be subject to mechanical damage they
shall be protected by conduit.

3.0 CABLE

All cables supplied and installed shall be selected shall be LSF / Fire proof types with
stranded copper conductors and shall comply with the appropriate British Standard
referred to below as applicable.

(i) LSF insulated wiring cables
non-armoured 450/750V grade BS. 6491.

(ii) LSF insulated steel wire
armoured LSF sheathed cables 600/1000V grade BS. 6346.

(iii) XLPE insulated steel wire armoured
LSF sheathed multi-core cables 600/
1000 V grade. BS. 5467.

(iv) LS ZH cables BS. 6724.

(v) Fire resistant cables BS. 4066 Part-1
IEC332 & BS 6387
Category CWZ
SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 5 of 8

(vi) Flexible cables

a) single core LSF insulated
non sheathed cables. BS. 6004.

b) cables for wiring of luminaires BS. 4533.

(vii) MICC Cables BS 5750

(viii) Control cables XLPE and LSF insulated 600 / 1000V BS 5467 BS 6346

Cable specification and manufacture must be consistent throughout each wired system.
All cable utilised must be continuously run from source to termination, without any through
jointing included.

Cable must be adequately stored and protected from damage pending installation and
also during installation until permanent protection is effected.

Cable reels must be supported on purpose formed support frames and under no
circumstance shall cable be drawn from reels laid on the ground. This shall be strictly
enforced as the Engineer's condemnation of any cable that is considered to have been
abused will involve total replacement at cost to the Contractor.

The cross sectional area of every cable shall be suitable for carrying the maximum
sustained load current under normal conditions and shall be selected in accordance with
related Regulations. The cross sectional area of the neutral conductor for 3-phase circuits
shall be equal to the cross sectional area of the phase conductors. The cables shall be
selected such that the drop in voltage from the origin of the installation to any point in the
installation does not exceed 4% of the nominal voltage when the conductors are carrying
the full load current, but disregarding starting conditions. Voltage drop calculation shall be
submitted for approval and the cross sectional area of the cable shall be increased
accordingly if required to meet the above mentioned requirement without any extra cost.

The cables connected in parallel shall be of the same type, cross sectional area, length
and disposition and be arranged so as to carry substantially equal load currents.

Where cables are to be connected to bus bars, breakers etc. The insulation and/or sheath
shall be removed for a distance of 150mm from the connection and replaced by suitable
heat-resisting insulation.

The wire armour of single core cables in the same circuit shall be bounded together at
both ends.

4.0 CABLE INSTALLATION

The installation of cables shall conform to IEC regulations and DEWA requirements.

All cables shall be protected against any risk of mechanical damage to which they may
be liable in normal conditions, of service. Where cables are installed under floors or in
ceiling voids, they shall be run so that they are not liable to be damaged by contact with
the floor or the ceiling or their fixings. Where the cables passes through holes in metal work,
care shall be taken to prevent abrasion of the cables on any sharp edges.

SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 6 of 8

All cables rising through floors and trench covers shall be protected, for example, by a
length of lead or steel or PVC pipe which should project at least 75mm above the finished
surface level. The open end of the pipe shall be sealed with a suitable compound. Lead
and PVC pipes shall be used where they will be free from mechanical damage or in
situations where steel pipe would be subject to corrosion.

The cables installed throughout the system shall be enclosed in conduit, duct, ducting or
trunking as specified.
All cables buried in the ground shall incorporate an armour and all cables installed in
positions which may be exposed to direct sunlight shall be supported by heavy duty cable
tray and shall be suitably covered by a standard ventilated stand and non perforated
cover to protect from ultra-violet light.

Cable ties shall be utilised to fix cables into cable trays, cable separator and cable retainer
shall be utilized to fix cables into cable trunking.

All conduits, ducting and trunking shall be properly supported and of a type suitable for
any type of mechanical damage to which they may be liable in normal conditions of
service or adequately protected against such damage. The internal radius of every bend
of a non-flexible cable shall be as recommended by manufacturer and the related
standards.

Cables under roads, and where deemed necessary under pipe tracks etc., shall be
protected by concrete encased PVC ducts. Bitumen bonded fibre ducts shall not be used
under any circumstances. Conduit buried in trenches or in the ground is not permitted.

Where existing cable sleeves are to be utilised, the contractor shall ensure that the lower
most ducts are employed, thereby leaving any remaining ducts accessible for future use.

Cable ducts shall be sealed at both ends using materials that are not soluble in
hydrocarbons, and that are resistant to any likely corrosive and insect attack in the area
concerned.

Fire Barriers

Where conduit, ducting and/or trunking pass through fire-resistant structural elements such
as walls and floors designated as fire barriers, the openings made shall be sealed
according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance. In addition to this external fire
barrier, an internal fire-resistant barrier shall also be provided to prevent the spread of fires.

Cables Installed Underground

Direct buried cables shall be bedded in 75mm of clean sand or riddled soil, covered with
similar material, then protected by concrete slabbing or interlocking tiles. The trench shall
be backfilled over a plastic identification tape laid for as detailed under cable and cable
trench marking.

Prefabricated concrete troughs or preformed trenches in which cables are laid shall be
filled with clean sand to provide the top layer of cables with a minimum of 75mm cover, or
be completely filled with sand if this should be required by circumstances.

Prefabricated cable troughs, partly or wholly filled with sand shall be closed using
prefabricated concrete covers. Such covers shall be provided, by the contractor, to meet
SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 7 of 8

any particular load bearing requirements but shall not be less than adequate for use as a
footpath.

Preformed trenches shall be sand filled and closed by floating over with concrete of
adequate strength and thickness.

The use of chequer plating and other materials for closing cable troughs, trenches etc.,
shall be confined to those conditions where such special treatment is fully justified
technically and economically and shall be agreed by the Engineer.

Power cables operating at voltages of 415 volts and above shall not be routed below
'jacked-up' typed unfixed flooring systems in any internal area unless unavoidable for the
purpose of supplying equipment installed on the flooring system. In such cases the power
cables must be totally enclosed within a steel trunking, conduit, etc., over their entire route
length below the flooring system irrespective of the type of cable used.

Cable trench and prefabricated trough depths should not normally have less than 500mm.
Direct buried cables should not normally have less than 500mm of cover from cable to
finished grade level. The above shall be varied according to the requirements of actual
site conditions and cable routes to provide adequate safeguard against, for example,
erosion, soft ground conditions and mechanical damage etc. The maximum thickness of
any one group of cables shall not exceed 75mm unless otherwise agreed with the
Engineer.

Cable Sheath of External Buried Cables

All cables directly buried in external areas should have MDPE (medium density
polyethylene) outer sheath other characteristics of external cables shall be similar to XLPE
insulated cables.

Cable in Duct

All external cables shall be laid in 150mm dia UPVC underground ducts of 3.2mm wall
thickness.

Cable and Cable Trench Marking

All cables shall be fitted with indestructible identification bands at each end and then over
their entire length at 30 metre intervals, at all points where they enter and leave ducts, and
at changes in direction, etc.

Concrete or slabs covering cable trenches shall be coloured for identification purposes.
Similarly where cables run under floors, markers shall be employed to clearly define the
extent of the cable way over the entire route.

The route of underground electric cables shall be marked by permanent markers posts.
They shall be reinforced concrete units fitted with lead inserts bearing cable sizes and
references. The marker post shall extent above ground level or shall be flush with the final
ground level according to the site and Engineer's requirements. Two or more markers shall
be visible from any point on the route and markers shall be placed at any divergence from
the straight.

The location of all underground power cables shall be clearly identifiable throughout their
route length by means of a polyethylene board laid in the ground at 300mm above each
SYSTEM OF WIRING

Page 8 of 8

cable. The board shall be coloured red and continuously marked, with black indelible
lettering of not less than 12mm high, to read the following message in both Arabic and
English:

"CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC CABLE 300 mm BELOW"

A sample of the polyethylene board shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior
to any cable laying works being carried out.

The cable trench as shown on the drawings between service block and main building
cable termination room shall be decided taking into consideration of laying all cables
within the trench in 3 or 4 layers on cable ladders with sufficient access space. The
crossing of other services through the trench must also be considered while deciding the
exact width and depth.

Jointing and Terminations

All cable conductor shall be fitted with a correctly sized cable socket or thimble and a
means of identification. The cable sockets may be of the sweated or crimped
compression types. If for the former the solder should have a melting point of not less than
185 deg.C and if for the latter they must be the appropriate tools as specified by the
manufacturers of the joint connectors. The cable terminations shall be made following the
positive identification of the conductors in accordance with the specified phase rotation
sequence.

Joints in cable are not allowed and shall not be carried out without the written approval
of the Engineer. Low tension cable joints shall incorporate compression type ferrules with
polyethylene tape insulation housed in a plastic joint box and sealed with cold pouring
resin fitting.

5.0 FLEXIBLE FIRE RESISTANT CABLES

Fire resistant cable shall have stranded (if installed in conduits within slab) plain
annealed copper conductors to BS 6360 with extruded silicone rubber insulation to BS
6899 and Aluminium/PVC laminate and PVC composite sheath with tinned copper
circuit protective conductor. The cable shall be manufactured and tested to BS
7629.1993. The conductors shall be solid if installed externally on any surface, and
clipped directly.

The cables shall be rated at 300/500V and shall be suitable for operation at sheath
temperature of 70 deg. C.

The cable shall comply with the flame retardant requirements of BS 4066: Part 1, and the
requirements of BS 6387, category CWZ and IEC-332. The cable shall be LSZH type.

The Fire resistant cables used for the wiring of Fire Alarm System and Central Emergency
Lighting System shall be laid in conduits embedded in slab or wall.

LIGHTING

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 10

LIGHTING

LIGHTING

Page 2 of 5

SECTION 10

LIGHTING

INDEX

1.0 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.0 EXTERNAL LIGHTING

3.0 SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FITTINGS

LIGHTING

Page 3 of 5

1.0 LIGHTING EQUIPMENT, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Complete data sheets from the manufacturer shall be included in the submittal of each
luminaire.

Lighting equipment and lighting fixtures shall be as called for on plans by designated
symbols and type. Said equipment shall embody the highest standards of electrical and
mechanical design with maximum efficiency obtainable and all shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.

Furnish and install a full complement of all types of incandescent and discharge lamps
required in the fixtures installed throughout the complex.

All hangers, cables, supports, channels, frames and brackets of all kinds for safely erecting
this equipment in place, shall be furnished from the standard manufacturer's product
range and shall be erected in place under this Section.

Contractor shall protect all opening edge in gypsum false ceiling by a protection means to
engineers approval.

Each lighting fixture shall have a manufacturer's label affixed to it and shall comply with
the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction.

Fixtures shall be wired with approved fixture wire. Each fixture shall be wired to a single
point with adequate slack for proper connections.

All fixtures shall be protected from damage during the installation and any broken fixtures,
globes, sockets, stems, and the like, shall be replaced with new parts, without additional
cost of the Employer.

The right to select other fixtures of the same quality, without additional cost to the Employer
is reserved by the Engineer regarding the shape of the lighting luminaire.

All lighting fixture shop drawings, cuts, etc., shall be complied and submitted in bound
brochures. All loose pages, sheets, clippings, etc., will not be accepted. Catalogue cuts
shall contain sufficient data to evaluate all properties of the fixtures submitted. If requested
a sample of proposal fixture shall be submitted.

The supply to lighting fittings mounted on or recessed into a false ceiling shall be effected
by means of a plug in type ceiling rose plug in type mounted on a conduit box within the
false ceiling space with a three core heat resisting flexible cable connection. When fixtures
are surface mounted to the ceiling, ceiling rose shall be provided adjacent to the fixture.

All prismatic controllers for fluorescent fittings shall be of the injection moulded acrylic type
to obviate discoloration. Plastic diffusers will not be accepted.

When light fittings are installed in areas with plaster board false ceiling, supply wires shall be
directly terminated in the fitting with proper connectors. The wires shall be contained in
flexible conduits inside the ceiling void. The flexible conduit shall terminate at both ends
with proper adaptors.

LIGHTING

Page 4 of 5

2.0 EXTERNAL LIGHTING

Furnish and install external lighting fittings of the types specified and in the positions indicated
on the drawings. Check all requirements regarding conduit runs and positions and the casting
in of conduit.

The Contractor shall also be responsible for the installation and wiring of the external
lighting installation as shown on the drawing and in accordance with the schedule of light
fittings.

3.0 SCHEDULE OF LIGHT FITTINGS

Light Illumination

The lighting illumination shall be in compliance with Chartered Institute of Building Services
Engineering (CIBSE). The lux level shall be as follows:

S. No. Location Lux Remarks
1. Plant rooms 300
2. Reception Desk 500
3. Ward Corridors 200
4. Nurses station 500
5. Operating Theatres:
Special Lighting for the
operating table.
i. Operating table
(operation light)
50000 to
100000
ii. All other areas 500
6. Conference room 500
7. Staircase 200
8. Store, dirty room 200
9. Pantry 400
10 Consulting room 400
11 Observation 400
12 Laboratory 500
13 Treatment suit 400
14 X Ray 400
15 Examination room 400 General
1000 Local (Local examination
luminaire).
16 Maternity 400 General.
1000 Local (Local examination
luminaire).
LIGHTING

Page 5 of 5

S. No. Location Lux Remarks
17 Pharmacy 500
18 Library 500
19 Lift lobby 250
20 Loading bay 150
21 Kitchen/pantry 500
22 Car Parking 50

The contractor shall provide detailed lux level calculations for all areas to confirm the
performance of the selected light fittings for consultant/client approval.

Schedule

For light fitting details refer to electrical lighting drawings.

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM

Page 1 of 9

SECTION 11



Page 2 of 9

SECTION 11

LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM -INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 CONTROL SYSTEM CONCEPT

3.0 CENTRAL CONTROL SOFTWARE
4.0 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES
5.0 TIMERS
6.0 LIGHT SENSOR
7.0 LIGHTING CONTROL PANELS
8.0 INPUT CONTROL DEVICES
9.0 MOTION SENSOR, FLUSH MOUNTED


Page 3 of 9

1.0 General

The Programmable Lighting Management System shall be supplied, installed and
commissioned in accordance with the European Installation Bus EiB technology.

The system shall also work as a stand-alone unit including timing functions incase of PC
failure and shall be programmable locally. Proposed system shall not have any bottle
neck or single source of failure. Proposal shall be based on a redundant system.

A two-wire bus cable shall link+ all sensors (push buttons, brightness sensors, motion
sensors, timers, etc.) and actuators (on/off controllers, dimming controllers, etc.) to each
other. The bus cable shall be a twisted pair, screened & shielded with solid conductors
and shall be capable of handling information exchange and supplying power to the bus
devices. The bus cable shall be laid in the building in the form of a linear, star or tree
structure similar to the power mains.

The system shall be completely de-centralized and programmable. The programming
shall be implemented via a high end PC located in BMS room and having access level
passwords. Any device in the system shall be accessed for programming from the PC
location without having to manipulate the device locally.

Each device in the system shall be addressable via a software programmable physical
address. Any device in the system shall communicate with any other device via software
programmable group addresses (telegrams). Each individual device will respond to only
those group addresses for which they are programmed to do so. There shall be an
EEPROM storing the physical address, group addresses & other software parameters for
every device, thus making it intelligent. No centralized processors or centralized memory
storage devices shall be permitted.

It shall be possible to program any of the devices on-line at the working site without
affecting any of the system devices or the system operation as well as off-line prior to
despatch of the material to site.

The entire system shall consist of bus lines each consisting of up to 64 devices. Two
consecutive lines shall be connected to each other via line couplers that act as network
filters and also provide communication between devices in different lines. In the event
of failure of a device in one line, only the control functions controlled by that device
shall be affected and the device failure report shall be printed out with the date and
time of failure.

The power supply module feeding power to the network shall consist of a built in back-
up power to compensate short voltage interruptions of upto 200 ms. This back-up power
shall enable the system to put all actuators in a fail-safe position (either on or off or as it
is) in the event of power failure.

The diagnostic modules shall scan the system for any faults in the bus wiring, failure of
any of the devices and generate reports displaying the physical address of non-
communicating devices.

The Lighting Management System shall also be integrated with the Building
Management System in automation layer so as to monitor and control the required

Page 4 of 9

circuits from the BMS workstation and hence to achieve a reliable system. EIB / C-bus
interface to be provided for total integration.

It is electrical Contractors scope and responsibility to re-arrange circuiting to achieve the
functionality of C-bus / EIB system as explained without any claims.
The following codes and standards to the extent specified herein, form a part of this
specification. When an edition date is not indicated for a Code or Standard the latest
edition enforce at the time of proposal submitted shall apply.

IEC 60947-4 Contactors
IEC 60947-5-1, IEC337-1,
IEC 60536 Indication lamps, Push buttons, switches

BSEN 60529
BSEN61439 Low voltage switchgear and control gear

BSEN 61008 Earth leakage circuit breakers
BSEN 60898 Miniature circuit breakers

BS7671 17
TH
Edition, IEE wiring regulations

2.0 CONTROL SYSTEM CONCEPT

The programmable lighting management and control system shall consist of following
levels of control.

The BMS shall be utilised for time based control and manual override by the BMS
operator. The EIB system shall be software interfaced with BMS and transfer all data to
BMS. The software shall consist of graphics based overview of the entire building, floors
and going up to the individual rooms. It shall have the necessary timer modules to
control the circuits in the form of various groups. It shall be possible to pre-program the
time channels in advance with special holiday programs, weekly programs, etc.

In the event the PC is not operational or is switched off, the standalone mode shall
control the lighting circuits as per programmed times. This shall be ensured via controllers
programmed with the same timer schedules as that of the central PC software.

A second level of standalone operation shall also be possible via local timer modules
capable of being programmed with switching times locally without the need to connect
a PC. 4-channels timer capable of being programmed with at-least 128 time schedules /
timer shall be provided for each network group of 64 devices to ensure this standalone
operation. This shall ensure that the system remains operational at all times in the auto
mode.

All other circuits which are controlled based on occupancy sensors, daylight, local
switches, etc. shall at all times be working in the standalone Auto mode with monitoring
and override control possible from the central PC.

Lighting Control Concept


Page 5 of 9

All lighting shall be controlled such that unnecessary lights shall be switched Off based
on occupancy and duty hours. Also lights redundant due to sufficient daylight shall be
switched Off based on light sensor and time schedules.

The movement sensors shall have a built-in lux sensor with an adjustable set point so as
not to switch On circuits even after detecting movement due to sufficient natural light.
There shall also be an adjustable Off delay on the movement sensor from 1 sec to 16
min so as to ensure that circuits are not switched Off immediately. Further, the
movement sensor shall incorporate a manual-auto-off switch for maintenance and
local override purpose.

Lighting control in different areas shall be as follows:

The scenes or requirements listed below must be programmable as per site requirements.

a) Car Parking

Lights connected to emergency circuit shall be ON all the time
Switch OFF all lights
Switch off 50% of drive way lights.
Parking bay On / Off and 50% on/off.
Ramp lights shall be kept ON during night time and shall be selectable.
Stair lights operated through push buttons and switch OFF after defined time.
b) Corridor, Lift Lobbies

Switch 50%, 50% lights based on occupancy.
Switch OFF all lights.
Switch On lights connected to Central Emergency Lighting System.
Movement sensor based operations.

c) External

Switch On / Off external lights in ground and roof floors, faade (elevation) lights,
signboards, etc. based on time lighting level (programmable) and season.

Switch On / Off external faade lights based on the requirements of faade
lighting Consultant. Complete faade lighting shall be controlled through
Lighting Control System as per lighting Consultants requirements.

Number of daylight / twilight sensors must be suitable to achieve the operation
and exact location to be decided at site. Contractor to include additional
sensors if required while commissioning proper coverage without any variation.


Page 6 of 9

A four channel timer device shall control circuits on a particular network group
(line) so as to have local standalone operation. It shall be possible to send signals
from a timer channel in one network to circuits in another network if
programmed to do so. This is to ensure that all timer channels are available for
control of all circuits in the system. Each timer shall be capable of being
programmed locally with at-least 128 timer programs for any of the four channels
combined together, without the need to connect a PC. Each of the four
channels shall have a manual push-button to over-ride the channel to On or
Off irrespective of the time programs. In addition, each channel shall have a
Off-Auto-Manual switch for local over-ride purpose. The timer shall have a built-
in battery back-up to ensure that the timer is always operating even in the event
of power failure. This timer device shall be in addition to the PC software time
schedules to ensure uninterrupted stand-alone operation of the system at all
times.

e) Staircase lighting

All staircase lighting shall be controlled by timers and push button switches. Light
shall be turned ON using the push button switches and shall be turned OFF
automatically after a pre determined time period which can be set using the
timer.

Separate timer control shall be provided for each group of lights such as facia
lighting, land scape lighting, water feature lighting, Walkway/road lighting, and
boundary wall lighting as applicable.

Actual time schedule for the various circuits shall be decided during
commissioning time and shall be to the approval of consultant.

f) Offices, Doctors Offices, Stores, Staff Lounges, Nurses Rooms, Examination /
Treatment Rooms, Multi-Purpose Rooms, sterilization, pharmacy, Outpatient
Clinics, Etc:

lighting control shall be by timer channels and override switch in the above
mentioned areas. lights in individual offices shall be turned on/off using the
intelligent switch during working hours, however the system switches shall be
overridden by timer schedules during non-working hours and on holidays in which
lights shall be turned off. Different application areas shall have separated timer
channels

g) Conference and Meeting Rooms

Lighting control shall be by timer channels and intelligent lighting control switch.
Lights in individual rooms shall be turned on/off using the intelligent switch during
working hours; however the system switches shall be overridden by timer
schedules during non-working hours and on holidays. Intelligent dimmer switches
for dimming the lighting during presentation

h) Wards Corridors

All lights connected to emergency power supply shall be on all the time. lights
connected to the power supply shall be on/off through programmable timer
channel, actual time schedule as per client requirements. Dedicated timer

Page 7 of 9

channel will be provided for wards corridor lighting. Intelligent switches shall be
provided at nurse station for the purpose of overriding

i) Entrance at Ground Floor

Lighting shall be switched on/off based on available daylight. A light value
switch capable of switching up to three lighting groups where each individual
channel has a separate switching set point shall be used. The brightness range of
the set points shall be adjustable from 2 to 2000 lux or 20 to 20000 lux as agreed
with the client at the time of commissioning. A light sensor shall be connected to
the switch to detect daylight.

3.0 CENTRAL CONTROLLER SOFTWARE

The software shall be same as used for BMS. EIB system shall be fully Software integrated
with BMS.

The software shall administer 255 access levels for 255 different user accounts to ensure
responsibility and accountability in the operation of the system.

The software shall provide customized graphics screens giving a full graphics display of
the entire building along with floorplans, partition layouts, circuit layouts in the individual
rooms, etc.

The software shall provide real time monitoring of the entire system and shall display
active status of each lighting circuit along with the run time hours and generate
maintenance schedules when the circuits have reached their threshold set-points for run
hours.

It shall be possible for the user to access any individual room for monitoring and
controlling the lighting circuits. The various screens shall be freely linked to each other
(hyper-link principle) or be reached by a navigator (Quick-finder).

Each circuit shall be graphically customized to contain operational characteristics
available in the system or by a link to an external database. This information shall be
displayed by passing the mouse cursor over the respective circuits (tip-strip mode).

The software shall have the interface to import and administrate graphics files having
standard formats such as Bitmap (BMP), Windows Metafile (WMF) and Enhanced
Metafile (EMF). Further, it shall be possible to add a huge variety of active elements to
these files for visualisation and easy understanding.

The software shall enable repeat interrogatory sweeps to be programmed through the
nigh or any other times to extinguish lighting which may have been left on locally.

The timer library in the software shall be programmable. It shall have the necessary timer
modules to control any of the circuits individually or in the form of groups which can be
selected and changed as and when desired. It shall be possible to pre-program the time
channels in advance with special holiday programs, weekly programs, etc. upto the
year 2040.


Page 8 of 9

4.0 LIGHTING CONTROL MODULES

The lighting control modules shall be DIN rail mounted consisting of four individually
programmable integral relays (contactors).

Each of these contactors shall be rated 10/20A A/AC3 together with a switch-on current
carrying capacity suitable for switching loads with high switch-on peaks. Additional
contactors shall not be used to control any of the lighting circuits.

The output states of each of the four relays shall be displayed on the front. Each of these
relays shall be latch-on type with manual operation (override) possible even without
power to the system.

In the event of power failure or bus wiring failure or control module failure, each of the
four relays shall attain a pre-programmed fail-safe position (On, Off or As it is).

The control modules shall be capable of been programmed with different applications
to suit site requirements for e.g. staircase lighting function which switches Off the relays
after a preprogrammed time from the time it has switched On. The application for
which a relay has been programmed shall apply irrespective of the signal from which it is
switched.

Each of the relays shall be capable of being programmed with its own On and Off
delays which is applicable irrespective of the signal from which the relays are switched.

The control modules shall receive its operating power supply from the same bus cable
without any other power supply. It should not operate on any 220/240 V AC supply to
avoid possible fire hazards.

Each of the control module shall have its own individual address and shall be capable of
being programmed from the central PC for the purpose of changing parameters
without the need to access the module locally.

5.0 TIMERS

These devices should provide a 100-channel time function used to control, monitor and
schedule any devices on the system. A touch sensitive graphic user interface with
customised text should be provided. The device shall feature a scheduler on-board to
schedule events on the network. The device shall be used to monitor and control the
devices located on the network.

6.0 LIGHT SENSOR

Light level sensors: These devices are designed to measure lighting levels and
automatically generate messages onto the bus to regulate light levels within
defined limits. For indoor applications measuring range should be between 20
3000 lux. For out door applications, measuring range should be between 1 lux to
full sunlight. Lux level range and set points should be programmable, and the
sensor should be able to control any number of circuits connected to the bus.

Protection - IP 54 acc. DIN 40 050

Operating temperature range - 40C to + 70C

Page 9 of 9

Connection Lighting sensor - 3 screw terminals connection cross section 0.5 1.5
mm2.
Weight - 0.04 kg

Type - Light value switch, 3-channel LW/S 3.1 light
sensor LF/A 1.1
7.0 LIGHTING CONTROL PLANELS

LCPs shall be located near to DBs. There shall be a dedicated Lighting Control Panel
(LCP) for every DB feeding lighting circuits in general areas. The LCP shall house the
system devices and the related control equipment depending on the no. of circuits
being controlled. This is to ensure the power wiring between the DBs and the control
modules inside the LCPs is kept to a minimum. The LCPs shall be surface mounted IP65
polycarbonate enclosures together with built-in DIN-rails for easy installation of the
control equipment.

The wiring of the lighting circuits must be re-arranged without any variations to meet all
the specified lighting control requirements.
8.0 INPUT CONTROL DEVICES
Input modules shall comprise the following types;

Key input units (programmable switches): These shall be available in a range of styles,
colours and finishes. The key inputs shall feature led status indicators and shall be
programmable as dimmers, timers, toggle and master switches. Switches shall feature an
infrared receive option and shall be programmable as scene controllers.

No. of gangs shall be indicated on drawings. The briefing rooms, conference rooms shall
be provided with 4 scene / 2 scene dimmer modules. Touch pad shall be provided as
shown on drawings.
9.0 MOTION SENSOR, FLUSH MOUNTED
Motion device sensor with sensor angle 180 degrees is used to send switch-on
commands to actuators via the i-bus EIB. The switch-off behaviour is defined in the
actuator. Twin light sensor and after-running time are adjustable; manual operation for
ON/AUTOMATIC/OFF must be possible. Installation recessed ceiling mounted, wall
mounted or external weather proof mounting to engineers approval. Supplier must
provide all mounting accessories required.

Sensing - Passive infrared motion
detector 180 horizontal
Power supply - via EIB Bus / C Bus
Ambient temperature
Operation - 5C to + 45C
Storage - 25C to + 55C
Coverage - Minimum 18m range
Transport - 25C to + 70C
Operating and display elements
1 slide switch - OFF/AUTOMATIC/ON
1 adjustment potentiometer - for Twilight sensor : 51000 lux.
1 adjustment potentiometer - for afterrunning time:10s to 17min.
Protection type - IP 20 according to DIN 40 050
Attached to the flush- mounted bus
couple
LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

Page 1 of 5

SECTION 12



Page 2 of 5

SECTION 12


INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SURGE PROTECTION

Page 3 of 5

1.0 GENERAL

Faraday cage type lightning protection systems shall be installed to cover the complete
building as per BS EN 62305.

A 25x3mm copper tape air termination network shall be fixed at 1m intervals using DC tape
clips to the building roof. Air termination network shall be following class I LPS with 5x5m
mesh.

Items of roof-mounted plant shall be bonded to the air termination network via same
copper tapes. All exposed metalwork on the roof or the structure shall also be securely
bonded to the air termination network. A bimetal clamp shall be used to bind different
metal.

25 x 3mm copper tape down conductors shall be installed within the structural column and
clamped using U clamps to structural rebar. Down conductors shall not be positioned
more than 10m apart around the perimeter. The connection between tape and cable
shall be by welded rod to tape clamp or prewelded if required.

The complete installation shall be inspected and certified by the authorized representative
of the manufacturer for compliance with standards.

The connection between the down conductor and the earth electrode shall be made
below ground level in a small purpose-made pit with test link and removable concrete
cover to facilitate future testing and maintenance. Each electrode shall consist of
1200x16mm or equal stainless steel rods complete with stud, spike, driving cap and a
conductor strip clamp. Sufficient number of rods of suitable length shall be installed to
provide an overall resistance to earth not exceeding 10 ohms.

All metal work on or around the building must be bonded to the lightning protection
network to avoid side flashing.

Where it is necessary to form tape to tape joints, they shall be tinned soldered and riveted.
Soldering alone will not be accepted. Clamped or bolted joints will only be accepted at
test points and for connection of down conductors to earth rods.

All materials used throughout the installation except earth rods shall be either copper or
copper based components which are corrosion resistant and compatible with the
application.

The Contractor shall submit fully detailed shop drawing for the air termination network,
down conductors, earth termination network and bonding and shall be responsible to
provide all the necessary accessories to integrate the system with the architectural finish of
the building.

2.0 ELECTRONIC SYSTEM SURGE PROTECTION

Electronic system surge protection shall be used for the, Incoming Main Power Supply :

A suitable protection should be installed in the main LV MDBs.

The ESP shall be connected in parallel with the supply. ESP should be installed within the LV
MDB by the panel assembler.

Page 4 of 5

HRC Fuses shall be provided in the connecting leads as required by the Specialist.

ESP to have neutral earth warning light, to detect if there is excessive voltage present
between neutral and earth.

Protection shall be tested in accordance with the requirement of:

BS EN 62305 : Protection against lightning.

BS2914 :1972 Specification for surge diverters for alternating current power circuits.

IEEE C62.41 1991 Recommended practice on surge voltage in low voltage AC Power
circuits.

The protector must not interfere with or restrict the system normal operation. It should not:

- Corrupt the normal mains power supply.
- Break or shutdown the power supply during operation.
- Have an excessive earth leakage current.

The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of no less than 10 KA (8 / 20
microsecond waveform) between any two conductors (phase to neutral, phase to earth,
neutral to earth).

The protector shall limit the transient voltage to below equipment susceptibility levels.
Unless otherwise stated, the peak transient let-through voltage shall not exceed 600 volts.
For protectors with a nominal working voltage of 230 or 240 volts, when tested in
accordance with BS 6651 : 1999 Category B High (6kV 1.2 / 50mircorsecond open circuit
voltage, 3kA 8 / 20 microsecond short circuit current).

This peak transient let through voltage shall not exceed for all combinations of conductors:

- Phase to neutral

- Phase to earth.

- Neutral to earth.

Mains protectors (installed in shunt / parallel) should have continuous indication of its
protection status and the presence of power. Status indication should clearly show per
phase.

- Full protection present.
- Reduced protection replacement required.
- No protection failure of protector.

The status indication should warn of protection failure between all combinations of
conductors, including neutral to earth. (Otherwise a potentially dangerous short circuit
between neutral and earth could go undetected for some time). This should include early
warning of excessive neutral to earth voltage.

Page 5 of 5

The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must
comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturer.

Protection for Data Communication and Telephone lines

Transient overvoltage protectors shall be installed on all data communication / signal /
telephone lines entering or leaving the building, in order to protect equipment connected
to the line, against transient overvoltages. (Where data lines travel between buildings
linking equipment in each building, transient overvoltage protectors should be installed at
both ends of the line in order to protect both pieces of equipment).

Protectors shall conform to BS EN 62305 Protection against lightning

The protector must not impair the systems normal operation. It should not:

- Restrict the system bandwidth or signal frequency.
- Introduce excessive inline resistance.
- Cause signal reflections or impendence mismatches (on high frequency systems).

The protector will have a low transient let through voltage for tests conducted in
accordance with BS EN 62305

This let through performance will be provided for all combinations of conductors :

- Signal line to signal line.
- Signal line to screen / earth.

The protector shall be rated for a peak discharge current of 10kA.

The protector shall be supplied with detailed installation instructions. The installer must
comply with the installation practice detailed by the protector manufacturers.

The protector manufacturer should allow for the facility to mount and earth large numbers
of protectors through an accessory combined mounting and earthing kit.

EARTHING

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 13

EARTHING

EARTHING

Page 2 of 4

SECTION 13

EARTHING

INDEX

1.0 MAIN EARTHING SYSTEM

2.0 CLEAN EARTHING SYSTEM

EARTHING

Page 3 of 4

1.0 MAIN EARTHING SYSTEM

1.1 The contractor shall adequately allow in his tender for the provision and the installation
of a complete earthing system required to meet the following requirements and shall
ensure that the entire electrical installation is effectively bonded to earth as per BS 7430
and DEWA Standards.

1.2 The contractor shall ensure that the whole of the electrical installation is both
mechanically and electrically continuous throughout and is bonded to a suitable main
earth in compliance with the IEE regulations and BS Code of Practice.

1.3 A test connection link shall be provided for testing purposes.

1.4 The nominal cross-sectional area of all earth continuity conductors shall be in
accordance with the IEE regulations with the minimum size being 2.5mm2.

1.5 All switchboards shall be provided with copper earth bar continuously run along the
switchboard frames. Main earth electrodes via earthing cables shall be connected to in
accordance with DEWA, requirements.

1.6 All switchgear, metal conduit and trunking systems, metal frames, enclosures, lighting
fittings and cables sheaths shall be bonded together and connected to the earth tapes
of the appropriate switchboard. Similarly all earth pins and metallic plates of socket
outlets, switches, accessories and enclosures shall be bonded to earth with earth
continuity conductors. Each individual earth path shall be electrically continuous
throughout its length from the farthest point of the associated part of the system back to
the main earth.

1.7 All earthing cables shall be installed in accordance with the relevant requirements
called for in the cables section of this specification.

1.8 All bonding leads in the form of cable having a standard conductor shall be terminated
in "sweated" sockets and shall be rigidly bolted to earthing terminals.

1.9 All earthing cables shall be insulated with a PVC sheath. Where connection of the earth
lead to the main earth is made with a stranded cable, the earth lead shall be double
insulated with PVC.

1.10 Mechanical protection shall be provided for all external runs of earth cable as specified.

1.11 Earth cables shall have same construction details as mains cables.

1.12 The main earth pits shall be complete with all accessories. The value for earth resistance
shall be 1 ohm or less.

1.13 Equipotential bonding conductors (6mm
2
minimum) shall be provided for metal pipes,
water pipes, metal doors and other extraneous conductive parts and brought to the main
earthing terminal in ground floor electrical room for final connection to the main earth pits.

1.14 The metal doors & door frames in electrical rooms and substations shall be equipotentially
bonded to the main earthing network.

1.15 The earth rods shall be stainless steel, corrosion resistant type.
EARTHING

Page 4 of 4

2.0 CLEAN EARTHING SYSTEM

2.1 Clean earthing system shall be provided for Operation Theatres, ICUs and Resuscitation
areas and shall consist 50 x 6mm riser bar connected to a separate earth pit and
connection point in each specified area. The UPS and low current panels shall also be
connected to the clean earthing system.
UPS SYSTEM

Page 1 of 19

SECTION 14

UPS SYSTEM

UPS SYSTEM

Page 2 of 19

SECTION 14

UPS SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 UPS

3.0 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

UPS SYSTEM

Page 3 of 19

1.0 GENERAL

Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of Un-interruptible power Supply
systems of capacities as shown on the related drawings. The system shall operate
in conjunction with the building electrical system and the generator to provide
high quality power for critical equipment loads such as computer servers and
related equipment, power outlets feeding main controllers of BMS, security system,
Fire alarm system etc. for a period of 30 minutes until the generator power is
available. This will hereafter be referred to as the UPS, and shall provide
continuous, regulated AC power to the loads under normal and abnormal
conditions, including loss of the utility AC power. The UPS shall be completely
solid-state except for maintenance bypass switches which may be mechanical.

All UPS shall have interface cards to have the following and shall be complete
with system software:

1) Required input and output dry contacts for reporting alarm and status.

2) RS232 port for serial communication for advanced remote monitoring
and control through computer network.

3) Communication port with appropriate protocol for connection to BMS
system.

All UPS systems shall be based on latest IGBT (insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor)
technology with PWM (Pulse Width Modulation).

Rectifier configuration shall be such that THDI (Total Harmonic Distortion Current)
at upstream shall be minimum.

The following shall be furnished along with the equipment:
Factory testing.

Documentation.

The UPS shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.

The equipment proposed must be in conformity with the following directives and
standards Directives

- 9/336/EEC (and amendments 91/263 and 92/31), 3/23/EEC, 3/68/EEC.
Standards

- Safety
N 50091-1-1 EN 60127, EN 60269-1
N 50091-1-2 EN 60445, EN 60529, EN 60950, EN 61008-1, EN 61009-1

- EMC
N 50091-2 EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2, EN 55011, EN 55022
UPS SYSTEM

Page 4 of 19

EC 62040-2 EN 61000-2-2, EN 61000-3-2, EN 61000-3-3,
EN 61000-4-1, EN 61000-4-2, EN 61000-4-4,
EN 61000-4-5, EN 61000-4-11, CISPR 16-1.

- Battery EC 896-2, Eurobat.

- Marking CE, TUV/GS

- Design Production Logistics & Service ISO 9001

- Applicable local laws and regulations

The UPS system shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the
following environment conditions in which it must operate, without mechanical or
electrical damage or degradation of operating characteristics:

a) Ambient temperature: 0 to 40 degrees C
b) Relative Humidity: Up to 95% (non-condensing)
c) Interference: The UPS equipment shall be provided with EMI/RFI
suppression following EN-50091-2.

Audible Noise: Noise generated by the UPS system under any condition of
normal operation shall not exceed an allowable sound pressure level of 55-70
dB(A) measured at 1 metre depending on the rating of the UPS.

2.0 UPS

Objectives: To supply, install, test and commission the Uninterruptible Power
Supply system as per the technical specifications laid down in this document.

Ratings : As per schematic
Quantity : As per schematic
Power factor : 0.9 (output) or higher KVA UPS if PF is 0.8.

The Uninterruptible Power Supply system specified herein should comply to each
of the following mandatory points keeping in view the very latest in UPS
technology to provide the best possible Power protection and most importantly
offer Maximum Energy Saving:

- UPS should be based on latest technology for Modulation for higher
accuracy and the best overall efficiency of 92% minimum.

- True On Line Double Conversion and Voltage Frequency Independent
(VFI).

- PS. Input Total Harmonic Distortion of Current THDI <5% using Active Filter
(DCU).

- Superior Battery Management for measurement of True Backup Time.
UPS SYSTEM

Page 5 of 19

- Back Feed Protection Devices on the Static Bypass and Inverter to
prevent Power feed back to the upstream devices.

- Digital Signal Processing for optimised inverter switching and fast and
precise control.

- IEM MODE (Intelligent Energy Management) for Parallel Redundant
Systems. Refer Section 10.0.

- Redundant Parallel Architecture and Paralleling Capability of up to 8 UPS
systems.

- The UPS manufacturer must be an ISO 9001 / EN 29001 certified
organisation with minimum 30 years experience in the design,
manufacture, servicing and testing of UPS Systems.

- TUV/CE Certification.

TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION

Active Filter (DCU) for 5
th
, 7
th
, 11
th
and 13
th
harmonics to reduce reflected
current harmonics THDI to a value of less than 7% and to improve input
power factor to 0.98 at full load. The filter must never present a capacitive
load to the mains. The DCU should operate on all UPS systems from 40kVA
till 500kVA.

This arrangement consists of a 6-pulse rectifier with the Active Filter (DCU)
connected at the input of the UPS in parallel. The Active Filter (DCU) will
be mounted in an additional matching cabinet.

Each UPS system shall consist of the following major components:

One rectifier/charger

One static inverter

One no-break static transfer switch

One maintenance by-pass switch

One battery bank

One main control and alarm panel complete with mimic diagram and
LCD display

OPERATION

The UPS system shall operate in any of the following modes:

- On-line Mode - During normal operation, the UPS system shall be used to
provide precise regulated and transient-free power to the computer
equipment loads. The mains supply provides power to the rectifier / charger.
UPS SYSTEM

Page 6 of 19

The rectifier / charger shall provide regulated DC power to support the
inverter and simultaneously maintain the battery in a fully charged condition.

The inverter shall convert the DC power into regulated AC power for the
load.
- Battery Mode - Upon failure of the mains supply, input power for the inverter
shall automatically be supplied from the directly connected battery. When
the mains is restored or the standby generator set supply is ready, input
power for the inverter and for recharging the battery shall automatically be
supplied from the rectifier/charger.

If the input does not return, the UPS shall automatically shut itself down in an
orderly manner when the discharge limit of the battery is reached.

- By-pass Mode - Upon the failure of static inverter, the no-break static transfer
switch shall be activated automatically to isolate the faulty inverter and at
the same time maintain a continuous supply to the system load. The
automatic transfer mode shall also operate in the event of system
overloading or if irregular or undesirable output for the load is detected. In
this case, the system shall automatically return to the original mode of
operation if the disturbance is cleared.

- Manual By-pass Mode - If the UPS system needs to be isolated for testing or
removed from service for maintenance, the maintenance by-pass shall
transfer the loads from inverter to the mains without interruption and vice
versa.

- Power Conditioner Mode - If the battery only must be taken out of service for
maintenance, it will be disconnected from the rectifier/charger and inverter
by means of a circuit breaker. The UPS shall continue to function and meet all
the performance criteria specified herein except for the protection time
requirement.

- Intelligent Energy Management (IEM) mode - In order to increase efficiency a
single UPS shall operate in IEM mode supplying the load through the static by-
pass line within specified tolerances (customisable). This transfer shall be
manual, automatic (load dependent) and programmable. In case of by-
pass out of set tolerance, the UPS shall transfer the load interruption free to
inverter line.

RECTIFIER

- General - The rectifier/charger must consist of a 12-pulse fully controller
Thyristor bridge, which converts the 3-phase utility voltage into a controlled
and regulated DC voltage, in order to supply power to the inverter, and to
simultaneously charge the battery.

UPS SYSTEM

Page 7 of 19

- Capacity - The rectifier/charger shall have sufficient capacity to support a
fully loaded inverter and at the same time maintain the battery in a fully
charged condition. If the battery is fully discharged, the rectifier/charger
shall recharge the battery to 95% of its fully charged condition within twelve
(12) hours and at the same time supplying full load current to the system.

- Walk-in - The rectifier/charger must contain a timed walk-in circuit to limit the
inrush current. The allowable initial inrush surge and the walk-in time should
be adjustable and not exceed 30 sec.

- Sequential power walk-in - a sequential walk-in of every single
rectifier/charger shall be automatically executed in case of the start up of a
parallel system in order to limit the inrush current to the value of one single
system.

- Current and Voltage Limit - The rectifier/charger output current and voltage
shall be limited to the battery supplier's recommendation.

Rectifier charger Technical Characteristics

Input Power

- Voltage = 400/230V
- Voltage tolerance =(+15%)
- Frequency = 50 Hz + 10%
- Power Factor > 0.8 lagging

BATTERY

- The battery banks must be stationary and of the following type: Absorbed
Glass Mat type, Sealed Lead Acid totally maintenance free with a minimum
design life of12 years at 25C.

- The batteries shall fully comply with BS 6290 part 4, IEC 896-2 and DIN 43534.
The proposed batteries shall have the following features:

Low self discharge
Multiposition usage
Spill proof and leak proof
Completely maintenance free, sealed construction.
Increased durability and deep cycle ability for heavy demand
application.
Value regulated Max internal pressure 2.5 psi.
FAA and IATA approved as non-hazardous.

UPS SYSTEM

Page 8 of 19

- End Cell Voltage should be limited to a maximum of 1.65VDC and not any
value below this to safeguard the life of the battery. The Charge voltage
should be set for 2.27-2.30VPC at 25C cycling.

- The 99% of the gas generated during normal operation shall be internally
recombined. The pole caps shall be Neoprene to prevent accidents. All
battery interconnectors must be solid or laminated tinned copper bars.

- The ampere-hour rating of the battery shall be sufficient to support the
inverter for the protection time of 15 minutes with the inverter operating at full
rated load at power factor 1.0 for 10-40kVA and 0.9 for 60 kVA - 500kVA.

- Specified Battery Manufacturers:

Exide-Sprinter Germany
Celltec USA
Dynasty USA
Yuasa Japan

BATTERY CABINETS:

- Bolted Construction, with double door, central supporting column,
removable side and top cover and open bottom. The cabinet must have a
piped frame with four removable battery shelves and screw on panels at top,
side and rear. Battery fused isolator must be located inside the cabinet with
auxiliary contact to indicate isolator close or open. The battery shall be
mounted in a cabinet matching the UPS Colour and supplied by the same
UPS Manufacturer.

- The UPS system must be provided with a manual and automatic battery test
(pre-selectable by day of the week, time of day, date of the month). The test
operates by slowly initiating a linear decrease of the rectifier output voltage.
If a battery fault is detected, the rectifier voltage will return to nominal
avoiding transferring the critical load on by-pass. Automatic battery test by
simply shutting down the rectifier is not permitted.

INVERTER

- General - Power transistors of the IGBT type must accomplish the conversion
of DC to AC. The technology should strictly be based on Latest IGBT
MODULATION Techniques.

- Failure of any components or power stage shall not interrupt the AC output
instead it shall disconnect itself from the configuration while transferring the
load to the static transfer switch and then activate an alarm.

- IGBT MODULATION TECHNOLOGY
The Modulation of the IGBTs shall be of latest technology and shall
incorporate Maximum modulation at 415 V AC Output. The Output
Transformer shall be designed for 415VAC. The Number of battery cells in the
UPS SYSTEM

Page 9 of 19

DC link shall therefore remain constant for all ranges of Output Voltages as
mentioned below

Output Voltage No. of Battery cells No. of Batteries
400V 192 32*
415V 192 32*
*Note: Exact no of batteries shall be as per manufactrurers standard.

- Superior Battery Management (SBM) - This feature should be built into the UPS
as standard and should facilitate the following

Measurement of true backup time.
Temperature Voltage compensation.
Programmable battery tests.
Increase in battery life.

- The waveform shall be fed through a filter circuit and protected by fast fuses.
The inverter shall be able to handle short-circuit conditions without any
damage.

- Frequency Control - The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled
by an oscillator, which can be operated as a free running unit or in
synchronised operation with a separate AC source or the future redundant
inverter.

If the external synchronising source deviates from the pre-set frequency by +
1% or 4% (selectable), the oscillator shall automatically revert to free running,
and the microprocessor controlled accuracy shall be + 0.01%.

- Capacitor Discharge - Output filter capacitors shall be provided with a quick
discharging circuit, which shall automatically discharge the capacitors to
safe value within a short time after the shutting down of the inverter.

- Inverter Technical details:

a. Output Power - Voltage = 400/230V, 3 phase, 4 wire
- Frequency = 50 Hz + 0,1%
- Adjustment = + 4% w/mains synch.

b. Total Harmonics - Linear Load = < 2%
- Non-linear Load = < 3% (to EN-50091)

c. Phase Displacement -100% balanced load = 120 +/-1%
-100% UNBALANCED LOAD = 120 +/-2%

d. Unbalanced Voltage - For balanced load = +/- 1%
- For unbalanced load = +/- 3%

e. Voltage Transients - 50% load step = +/- 2%
- 100% load step = +/- 3%
UPS SYSTEM

Page 10 of 19

- STATIC 100% LOAD = +/- 1%
- By mains recovery = +/- 1%

f. Recovery Time = 20 m sec. to + 1%

g. Inverter Overload Capability = 125% for 10 min.
= 150% for 1 min.
(30 sec for 400-500kVA)

h. Crest Factor > 3:1 (according to EN-
50091)

i. Fuse Clearance capability = 20% In within 5-10ms.

STATIC BYPASS

- The electronic by-pass shall consist of a static SCR / Thyristor-switch, used to
provide an uninterruptible transfer of the load to the utility in case of
remarkable variation of the output voltage. The electronic by-pass shall be
equipped with two contactors in series, which provide to supply the load
from utility or inverter.

- The electronic by-pass switch must have continuous 150% overload rating
capacity. In addition the static transfer switch shall support 200% overload for
5 minutes and 1000% overload for 10 milliseconds (non repetitive).

- Back feed protection - The electronic by-pass switch shall consist of a pair of
microprocessor controlled Thyristors and a contactor in series avoiding a
back feed energy into the mains (back feed).

- The electronic by-pass switch shall be able to be activated manually by a
switch/push button to affect the transfer. The switching time from inverter to
reserve and vice-versa shall be of No-Break when synchronised.

- Automatic retransfer delay time back to inverter from by-pass after a transfer
from inverter to by-pass shall be 10 seconds.

- The number of automatic transfer/re-transfer from by-pass to inverter when
the status of the inverter logic signals an alarm conditions, shall be selectable.

MAINTENANCE BYPASS

- On each UPS the maintenance by-pass shall be based on a pair of manually
operated circuit breakers which allow the electrical isolation of the UPS from
the load, while still supplying the load with power directly from the utility.

REDUNDANT PARALLEL ARCHITECTURE- RPA

- Where two or upto eight systems are to operate in parallel the system will
operate in Redundant Parallel Architecture or RPA. The following principles
are to be met in totality in order to achieve the highest levels of reliability.

UPS SYSTEM

Page 11 of 19

- Two or more UPS systems to be linked in Peer to Peer configuration
concurrently supplying the load.
Decentralized by-pass concept.
Decentralized control electronics.
Redundant (n+1) operation and control for critical functions such as
Synchronization and Bypass operation.
Redundant communication link between individual units.
Redundant MICROPROCESSORS for no Common point of Failure.
Intelligent Energy Management (IEM) for power saving. Refer Section 12.4.

- In the event that the system is to operate as separate standalone units then
disconnection of the RPA system should be possible without any changes in
the existing architecture of the system.

INTELLIGENT ENERGY MANAGEMENT (IEM)

- The IEM software package should be an integral part of the RPA system
which allows the RPA system to save energy during low load conditions. This is
achieved by requesting / programming the UPS or its Inverter to transfer its
load to the remaining UPS systems and go into a silent mode. This enables the
entire heat dissipation of this system to be nullified. This Silent system however
is On line electronically and will switch on as programmed in the event of a
problem with the utility or any other system. All this done without disruption to
the load.

- The IEM feature should ensure the following functions

Individual Inverters, which are not required to sustain the load can
automatically be switched off to save energy.
Depending on Load level, inverters are switched off Cyclically, so that
every UPS has the same amount of operating hours over a period of
time.
During an inverter switch off due to low load the remaining selected
inverters should sustain the load.
Customer to define if the rectifiers to remain ON for battery charging or
to be switched off for the UPS systems whose Inverters have been
selected to switch off.
Customer to define after how long or at what Battery level rectifier
should switch ON.
The IEM mode to be freely programmed to suit customer defined
degree of redundancy.
The reaction of the system in case of problems can also be selected
(for example: How the switched Off inverter or UPS should react to a
Utility failure).

UPS SYSTEM

Page 12 of 19

OPERATING PANEL AND DISPLAY

- A backlit 4 x 20 alphanumeric character Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) or similar
display, controlled by push buttons/membrane keys shall be provided.

- The UPS system main control panel with LCD back-lit display shall include the
following measurements indications:

Rectifier: input voltage (Ph-Ph), input frequency, number of rectifier
mains failure
Battery: voltage, temperature, charge/discharge current in Amperes,
remaining Autonomy time
Inverter: output voltage, output frequency, inverter temperature,
operating hours
By-pass: input voltage (Ph-N), input frequency, number of by-pass
mains failure
Load: load level in % (each phase), load current/phase in A, Load
power in KVA/kW
UPS: serial number, software version, number of overload condition,
operating hours

- The UPS system main control panel with LCD back-lit display shall include the
following events indications with date and time:

Rectifier: mains rectifier OK, rectifier ON/OFF.
Battery: start battery test, end battery test, no conditions for battery
test.
Inverter: inverter cannot be switched ON/OFF, inverter ON/OFF.
By-pass: mains by-pass OK, by-pass power insufficient, by-pass locked,
by-pass free.

- Load: load-OFF, multiple load transfer, load on by-pass/inverter, no
more overload Condition.

General: maintenance by-pass ON/OFF, inverter and mains
synchronised/not Synchronised, input circuit breakers open/closed.

- On the system alarm panel, a common audible alarm and the respective
indicating LEDs shall be initiated when any of the following conditions are
present:

Rectifier: mains out of tolerance; control logic failure,
UPS SYSTEM

Page 13 of 19

Battery:low voltage; high voltage; earth fault; contactor closing or
opening failure; insufficient power.
Inverter: fuse failure; contactor closing or opening failure; voltage out
of
tolerance; output power insufficient; overload.
By-pass: mains out of tolerance; contactor closing or opening failure.
Load: overload; load locked on inverter; load locked on by-pass.
General: load off for overload; battery low and over-temperature
conditions; inverter and mains not synchronised; UPS overload.
- The UPS, through the LCD, must be able to store up to 256 alarms or events
with date and time.

- Mimic Panel - A mimic panel shall incorporating LED indicators depicting the
complete single line diagram of the UPS system shall be silk-screened to
display the following:

A synoptic diagram of the UPS representing actual operational status
with integrated LEDs and power flow indications.
Emergency load shutdown (LOAD OFF) push button with protective
cover.
Signal SERVICE CHECK (LED) to indicate that maintenance is required.
COMMON ALARM, visual signal (LED) and acoustic signal (internal
buzzer).
Signal STOP OPERATION (LED), visual and acoustic warning
approximately 3 minutes (programmable) before complete automatic
load disconnection (for example when the battery is at minimum
voltage or inverter is over-temperature).
LED indication for the remaining back-up time and load level.
Command button keys for INVERTER ON and INVERTER OFF.
Command button key for LED functionality test.
Command button key (MUTE) to reset general alarms and buzzer

COMMUNICATION

- The UPS shall be equipped with a customer interface card, which will provide:

- 6 output dry contact available on terminal blocks (no/nc) and Delta
connector
these contacts shall be programmable out of 24 different alarms or events
directly from the keyboard mounted on the front panel of the UPS

UPS SYSTEM

Page 14 of 19

- Input Connections for customer provided signals must be available for
generator on (reduces battery charging current during mains failures) and
emergency power off to shutdown UPS and load in the event of an
emergency).

RS232 port for the following purposes:
Serial communication for advanced remote monitoring
communication via PC.
Serial printer connection.
Modem connection.

- Intelligent Energy Management - Energy management software shall be
provided for programming of system operational parameters. The software
shall allow the user to program the operating hours of each UPS in the system
during low load conditions so that each UPS is operating at its optimum
efficiency. i.e. if four (4) UPS are in parallel redundancy mode and the total
load is less than 50% of the UPS capacity, the software will shut down two (2)
units (inverter) during off-peak hours in order to save energy and thereby the
overall operating cost). If during off-peak condition, one UPS fails, the
software shall be able to switch ON one of the two non-operating UPS in
order to achieve the redundancy requested, this in max. 30 seconds time.
However, the functional requirement of the system must be maintained
during this period (i.e. redundancy is maintained)

- MODBUS RTU. In the event that Building Management System exists the
communication of the UPS to the BMS should be via MODBUS.

MECHANICAL DESIGN

- Colour - The UPS cabinet colour shall be RAL standard.

- Ventilation - Forced air-cooling shall be provided to ensure that all
components are operated within specifications with air entry in the base and
exit in the top. The air volume and fan speed must be microprocessor
controlled in relation to the load and the inverters heat sink temperature.

- Cable Entry - Input to the system and outgoing cables shall be from the
top/bottom front or top/bottom rear of the cabinet.

- Modular Construction - The UPS system shall be modular in construction for
ease of maintenance and to minimise downtime.

- Power Connections - Adequate space for termination shall be provided for
incoming and outgoing cables. The cables for interconnecting the UPS and
battery cubicles shall be supplied for side-by-side installation.

- Personal Safety - High voltage, low voltage and DC section of the system shall
be adequately separated to ensure safety during maintenance and
testing. The equipment shall meet the requirements of protection index IP 20.

UPS SYSTEM

Page 15 of 19

3.0 AUTO TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)

The automatic transfer switch shall be provided with fully rated overlapping
neutral transfer contacts. The neutrals of the normal and emergency power
sources shall be connected together only during the transfer and retransfer
operation and remain connected together until power source contacts close on
the source to which transfer or retransfer is being made The overlapping neutral
transfer contacts shall not overlap for a time duration greater than 100
milliseconds. A non-over-lapping neutral transfer (fourth) pole shall not be
acceptable.

TRANSFER SWITCH

- The transfer switch unit shall be electrically operated and mechanically held.
The electrical operator shall be a single solenoid mechanism, momentarily
energized to minimize power consumption and heat generation. The
operating transfer time shall be one-sixth (1/6) of a second or less.

- The switch shall be positively locked and unaffected by voltage variations or
momentary outages so that contact pressure is maintained at a constant
value and temperature rise at the contacts is minimized for maximum
reliability and operating life. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to
ensure only one of two possible positions-normal or emergency.

- All main contact shall be silver composition. Switches shall have segmented,
blow-on construction for high withstand current capability and be protected
by separate arcing contacts.

- Inspection of all contacts (movable and stationary), linkages and moving
parts shall be possible from the front of the switch without dis-assembly of
operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. A
manual operating handle shall be provided for maintenance purposes. The
handle shall permit the operator to manually stop the contacts at any point
throughout the entire travel to properly inspect and service the contacts
when required.

BYPASS-ISOLATION SWITCH (BPS)

- A two-way bypass-isolation switch shall provide manual bypass of the load to
either source and permit isolation of the automatic transfer switch from all
source and load power conductors. All main contacts shall be manually
driven.

- Power interconnections shall be silver plated copper bus bar. The only field
installed power connections shall be at the service and load terminals of the
bypass-isolation switch. All control interwiring shall be provided with
disconnect plugs.

- Separate bypass and isolation handles shall be utilized to provide clear
distinction between the two functions. The bypass handle shall provide three
operating modes: By-pass to normal, Automatic and bypass to emergency.
Bypass to the load carrying source shall be affected without any interruption
of power to the load (make-before-break contacts). The operating speed of
UPS SYSTEM

Page 16 of 19

the bypass contacts shall be the same as that of the associated automatic
transfer switch and shall be independent of the speed at which the manual
bypass handle is operated. In the automatic mode, bypass contacts shall be
all open so they will not be subjected to fault currents.

- The isolation handle shall provide three operating modes: Closed, Test and
Open. The test mode shall permit testing of the entire emergency power
system, including the automatic transfer switch(es), without any interruption
of power to the load. The open mode shall completely isolate the automatic
transfer switch from all source and load power conductors. When in the
Open mode, it shall be possible to completely withdraw the automatic
transfer switch for inspection or maintenance to conform to code
requirements without removal of power conductors or the use of any tools.

- When the isolation switch is in the TEST or OPEN mode, the bypass switch shall
function as a manual transfer switch allowing transfer and retransfer of the
load between the two available sources without the feedback of load-
regenerated voltage to the transfer switch. This transfer/retransfer operation
shall comply with Paragraph 42 of UL 1008.

MICROPROCESSOR CONTROL MODULE

- The control module shall direct the operation of the transfer switch. The
module's sensing and logic shall be controlled by a built-in microprocessor for
maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and inherent digital
communications capability. The control module shall be connected to the
transfer switch by an interconnecting wiring harness. The harness shall include
a keyed disconnect plug to enable the control module to be disconnected
from the transfer switch for route maintenance.

- The control module shall be completely enclosed with a protective cover
and be mounted separately from the transfer switch unit for safety and ease
of maintenance. Sensing and control logic shall be provided on plug-in
printed circuit bards for maximum reliability. Interfacing relays shall be
industrial control grade plug-in type with dust covers. All relays shall be
identical to minimize the number of unique parts.

- The control panel shall meet or exceed the voltage surge withstand
capability in accordance with IEE standard 4672-1974 (ANSI C37.90a-1974)
and the impulse withstand voltage test in accordance with the proposed
NEMA standard ICS 1-109.

OPERATION

Three phase control shall be provided for three phase power sources. Three
phase controls shall include a selector switch to enable temporary operation on
single phase power sources.

The voltage of each phase of the normal source shall be monitored, with pickup
adjustable from 85 to 100% and dropout adjustable from 75 to 98% of pickup
setting, both in increments of 1%, and shall be fully field adjustable without the
use of any tools, meters or power supplies. Repetitive accuracy of settings shall
be 2% or better over an operating temperature range of -20
o
C to 70
o
C. Factory
UPS SYSTEM

Page 17 of 19

set to pick up at 90% and drop out at 85%.

The control module shall include four time delays that are fully field-adjustable in
increments of at least 13 steps over the entire range as follows:

Time delay to override momentary normal source outages to delay all
transfer switch and engine starting signals. Adjustable from 0 to 6
seconds. Factory set a 1 second, unless indicated otherwise on the
plans.
Transfer to emergency time delay. Adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes.
Factory set at 0 minutes unless indicated otherwise on the plans.
Retransfer to normal time delay. Time delay is automatically bypassed
if emergency source fails and normal source is acceptable. Adjustable
from 0 to 30 minutes. factory set at 30 minutes unless otherwise
indicated on the plans. Provide a toggle switch to manually bypass
time delay on retransfer.
Unloaded running time delay for emergency engine generator
cooldown. Adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Factory set at 5 minutes,
unless indicated otherwise on the plans.

- A set of DPDT gold-flashed contacts rated 10 amps. 32VDC shall be provided
for a low-voltage engine start signal when the normal source fails. The start
signal shall prevent dry cranking of the generator by requiring the generator
to reach proper output, and to run for the duration of the cooldown setting
regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is
transferred. Also provide a commit/no commit to transfer selector switch to
select whether the load should be transferred to the emergency generator if
the normal source restores before the generator is ready to accept the load.

- A momentary-type test switch shall be provided to simulate a normal source
failure. Also, terminals for a remote contact which opens to signal the ATS to
transfer to emergency and terminals for remote contacts which open to
inhibit transfer to emergency and/or retransfer to normal shall be provided.

- A visual position indicator shall be provided to indicate bypass-isolation
switch position. Pilot lights shall indicate availability of power sources and
automatic transfer switch position. A prominent and detailed instruction plate
shall be furnished.

- One set of auxiliary contact shall be provided rated 10 amps, 480V AC,
consisting of one contact closed when the ATS is connected to normal and
one contact closed when the ATS is connected to emergency. Output
terminals to signal the actual availability of the normal and emergency
sources as determined by the voltage sensing pickup and dropout settings
for each source, shall be provided.

UPS SYSTEM

Page 18 of 19

- Each switch shall be furnished with an operator's manual providing installation
and operating instructions.

COMPLIANCE WITH CODES AND STANDARDS

- The ATS / BPS shall conform to the current requirements of:

UL 1008: Standard for automatic transfer switches
NFPA 70: National electrical code, including use in emergency and
standby systems in accordance with Articles 517,700, 701 and 702
NFPA 99: Essential electrical systems for health care facilities.
NFPA 110: Standard for emergency and standby power
systems.
IEEE Standard 446: IEEE Recommended practice for emergency and
standby power systems (Orange Book)
IEEE Standard 241:IEEE Recommended practice for electric power
systems in commercial buildings (Gray Book)
NEMA Standard ICS-2-447: AC Automatic Transfer Switches
IEC: Standard for automatic transfer switches

- The ATS shall be UL listed in accordance with UL 1008 as follows:

Rated in amperes for total system transfer including control of motors,
electric discharge lamps, eclectic heating and tungsten filament lamp
loads as referred to in paragraph 38.13 of UL 1008.
Switches 400 amperes and below shall be suitable for 100 tungsten-
filament lamp load. Switches rated above 400 amperes shall be
suitable for 30% tungsten-filament load.
Temperature rise tests after the overload and endurance tests to
confirm the ability of the transfer switches to carry their rated current
within the allowable temperature limits.
No welding of contacts. Transfer switch must be electrically operable
to alternate source after the withstand current tests.
Dielectric tests at 1960 volts, rms, minimum after the withstand current
test.

- In addition to the above, ATS / BPS for use with fire pumps shall conform to
the requirements of NFPA 20, standard for Centrifugal fire pumps.

WITHSTAND CURRENT RATINGS.

UPS SYSTEM

Page 19 of 19

- The ATS/BPS shall be rated to withstand the available rms symmetrical short-
circuit current at the ATS/BPS terminals with the type of overcurrent protection
shown on the plans.

TESTS AND CERTIFICATION

- All production units shall be subjected to the following factory tests:

The complete ATS / BPS shall be tested to ensure proper operation of
the individual components and correct overall sequence of operation
and to ensure that the operating transfer time, voltage, frequency and
time delay settings are in compliance with the specification
requirements.
The switch shall be subjected to a dielectric strength test per NEMA
Standard ICS 1-109.21.

- Upon request, the manufacturer shall provide a notarized letter certifying
compliance with all of the requirements of this specification including
compliance with the above codes and standards, and withstand current
ratings. The certification shall identify, by serial number(s), the equipment
involved. No exceptions to the specifications, other than those stipulated at
the time of submittal, shall be included in the certification.

CONFIGURATION AND MANUFACTURER

- The ATS / BPS system shall be supplied completely assembled in a form
enclosure BSEN 60439.

- The ATS / BPS manufacturer shall maintain a local service centre capable of
emergency services or routine preventive maintenance and shall offer
preventative maintenance contracts. The manufacturer shall maintain
records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum of 20 years.

ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 1 of 25

Section 15

ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 2 of 25

Section 15

ANALOGUE ADDRESSABLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Index

1.0 SYSTEM DISCRIPTION

2.0 VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

3.0 GRAPHIC COMMAND CENTER

4.0 INSTALLATION

5.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 3 of 25

1.0 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Furnish and install a complete analogue addressable Fire Alarm system as
described herein and as shown on the plans to be wired, connected, and left in
first class operating condition.

a) The system consist of stand alone analogue addressable fire alarm
control panel with integrated voice alarm system in the building and a
main fire alarm command center with mimic panel located in the control
room.

b) Any alarm or trouble from the peripheral circuits shall sound the buzzer,
glow the alarm /Trouble/LED provided for each sensor and the 80
character LCD shall display in plain language the nature of event in the
local stand alone panel and at the command centre, the same shall be
repeated at the repeater panel installed.

c) The sounder circuits shall be programmed in the control panel to have
primary or secondary (or) sequential bell ringing. With time delays if
necessary as instructed by the consultant during commissioning.

d) In case of an alarm, the bell shall ring as indicated above. The AHUs in
the related fire zone shall be switched off and a pre-recorded alarm
message shall be enunciated through the public address system.

e) The (AHUs) Air handling units shall be interlocked with the fire alarm
control panel for tripping purpose during fire condition.

f) The auxiliary circuits in the control panel shall be programmed to activate
corresponding to the nature of event. All equipment to be installed as
shown in the layout drawings.

g) The system shall be interlocked with the integral voice alarm system to
initiate a pre-recorded message announcement.

h) The system shall be interlocked with the security access control system to
release the door locks in case of fire, however exact sequence of
operation/control shall be to consultant approval.

i) The system shall also interfaced with elevator control system; sequence
of elevator recall in case of alarm activation shall be programmed in
accordance with consultant requirements and to their approval.

j) The system shall be Analogue addressable concept with closed loop
initiating device circuits, individual zone supervision, individual indicating
appliance circuit supervision, incoming and standby power supervision.
Include control panel, manual pull stations, automatic fire detectors,
sounders, annunciator, remote control devices, all wiring, connections to
devices, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and all other necessary material for
a complete operating system.

Audible alarm Notification:

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 4 of 25

Activation of any system fire, supervisory, trouble or status initiating device
shall cause the following actions and indications in the control panels:

a. Sound a pre announce alarm tone for a maximum of five
seconds followed by a field programmable digitized custom
evacuation voice message, on the floor of alarm, the floor below
and the floor above. At the end of the voice message, the alarm
tone shall resume. This sequence shall sound continuously until the
alarm silence switch at the control panel is activated

b. A simultaneous message shall be delivered via all alarm speakers
installed on the remaining floors indicating the requirement for
occupants of these floors to remain alert for further instructions.

c. An automatic announcement or tone evacuation signal shall be
capable of interruption by the operation of the system
microphone to give voice evacuation instructions overriding the
pre programmed sequences.

d. Status lights next to speaker selection switches on the control
panel shall indicate speaker circuit selection.

FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

Where shown on the plans, and as recommended by system manufacturer,
provide and install a Fire Alarm Control Panel. Construction shall be modular with
solid state, microprocessor based electronics with plug-in modules. It shall display
only that primary controls and displays essential to operation during a fire alarm
condition.

Although the keypad can be used for control of the entire system, it shall only be
used for maintenance purposes. Keypads shall not be visible or required to
operate the system during fire alarm conditions.

A local audible device shall sound during Alarm, Trouble or supervisory
conditions. This audible device shall sound differently during each condition to
distinguish one condition from another without having to view the panel. This
audible device shall also sound differently during each keypress to provide an
audible feedback (chirp) to ensure that the key has been pressed properly.

The fire alarm control panel shall allow for loading or editing special instructions
and operating sequences as required. The system is to be capable of on site
programming to accommodate and facilitate expansion, building parameter
changes or changes as required by local codes. All software operations are to
be stored in a non-volatile programmable memory within the fire alarm control
panel. Loss of primary and secondary power shall not erase the instructions
stored in memory.

The ability for selective input/output control functions based on ANDing, ORing,
NOTing, timing and special coded operations is to also be incorporated in the
resident software programming of the system.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 5 of 25

The system Initiating & Notification circuit to be provided with minimum of 20%
spare for connecting any future device as necessary.

CONTROL PANEL & OPERATION

Under normal condition the front panel shall display a "SYSTEM NORMAL"
message and the current time and date.

Should an abnormal condition be detected the appropriate LED (Alarm,
Supervisory, or Trouble) shall flash. The panel audible signal shall pulse for alarm
conditions and sound steadily for trouble and supervisory conditions.

The panel shall display the following information relative to the abnormal
condition of a point in the system:

a) Custom location label
b) Type of device (i.e.; smoke, pull station, water flow).
c) Point status (i.e.; alarm, trouble).

These three characteristics relative to an abnormal condition of a point shall be
displayed simultaneously. A LED for alarm and one for trouble shall be provided
for each room for zone identification as backup to the LCD Displayed. LCD only
Displays shall not be acceptable.

Pressing the appropriate acknowledge button shall acknowledge the alarm or
trouble condition.

After all the points have been acknowledged, the LED's shall glow steady and
the panel audible signal will be silenced. The total number of alarms, supervisory,
and trouble conditions shall be displayed along with a prompt to review each list
chronologically. The end of the list shall be indicated.

Alarm Silencing: Should the Alarm Silence button be pressed all alarm signals
shall cease operation.

The "System Reset" button shall be used to return the system to its normal state
after an alarm condition has been remedied. The display shall stop the user
through the reset process with simple English language messages. Messages shall
provide operator assurance of the sequential steps (like, "IN PROGRESS", "RESET
COMPLETED", and "SYSTEM NORMAL:) as they occur, should all alarm conditions
be cleared.

Should an alarm condition continue to exist, the system shall remain in an
abnormal state. System control relays shall not reset. The panel audible signal
and the Alarm LED shall be on. The display shall indicate the total number of
alarms and troubles present in the system along with a prompting to review the
points. These points will not require acknowledgement if they were previously
acknowledged.

FUNCTION KEYS

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 6 of 25

Additional function keys shall be provided to access status data for all system
points. As a minimum the status data shall include Disable/Enable Status,
Verification Tallies of Initiating Devices, Acknowledge Status, etc.

HISTORY LOGGING

In addition to any required printer output, the control panel shall have the ability
to store a minimum of three hundred (300) events in an alarm log plus a minimum
of three hundred (300) events in a separate trouble log.

WALK TEST WITH HISTORY LOGGING

The system shall be capable of being tested by one person. While in testing
mode, the alarm activation of an initiating device circuit shall be silently logged
as an alarm condition in the historical data file. The panel shall automatically
reset itself after logging of the alarm.

The momentary disconnection of an initiating or indicating device circuit shall be
silently logged as a trouble condition in the historical data file. The panel shall
automatically reset itself after logging of the trouble condition.

The walk test sequence shall have the capability of activating the alarm
indicating appliances to signal a unique code associated to the alarm zone.

The control panel shall be capable of supporting multiple numbers of testing
groups whereby one group of points may be in a testing mode and the other
groups may be active and operate as programmed per normal system
operation. After testing is considered complete, testing data may be retrieved
from the system in chronological order to ensure device/circuit activation.

Should an alarm condition occur from an active point, not in walk test mode, it
shall perform all standard programmed alarmed sequences.

LED SUPERVISION

All slave module LED's shall be supervised for burnout or disarrangement. Should
a problem occur, the panel shall display the module and the LED location
numbers to facilitate location of that LED.

SYSTEM TROUBLE REMINDER

Should a trouble condition be present within the system and the audible trouble
signal silenced, the trouble signal shall resound at preprogrammed time intervals
to act as a reminder that the fire alarm system is not 100% operational. Both the
time interval and the trouble reminder signal shall be programmable to suit the
users application.

ACCESS LEVELS

There shall be a minimum of four (4) access levels. Authorized personnel shall
only make changes to passcodes. Systems not capable of password protected
manual command operations shall provide key operated switches for these
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 7 of 25

functions. Function key switches shall be keyed differently from any other keyed
switches or locks used within the system.

In order to maintain security when entering a passcode, the digits entered will
not be displayed. All key presses will be acknowledged by local audible
momentary tones.

When a correct passcode is entered, an "ACCESS GRANTED" message shall be
displayed. The new access level shall be in effect until the operator leaves the
keypad inactive for ten (10) minutes or manually logs out.

Should an invalid code be entered, the operator shall be notified with a message
and shall be allowed up to three chances to enter a valid code. After three
unsuccessful tries, an "ACCESS DENIED" message shall be displayed.
Access to a level will only allow the operator to perform all actions within that
level and all actions of lower levels, not higher levels.

The following keys/switches shall have access levels associated with them:

a) Alarm Silence
b) System Reset
c) Set Time/Date
d) Manual Control
e) On/Off/Auto Control
f) Disable/Enable
g) Clear Historical Alarm Log
h) Clear Historical Trouble Log
i) Walk Test
j) Change alarm Verification.

Acknowledge keys shall also require privileged access to acknowledge points. If
the operator presses an acknowledge key with insufficient access, an error
message will be displayed. The points will scroll with each key press to view the
points on the list, but the points will not get acknowledged in the database.

DETECTION OPERATION

Smoke sensors shall be smoke density measuring devices having no self
contained alarm set point (fixed threshold). The control panel shall determine
the alarm decision for each sensor. The control panel shall determine the
condition of each sensor by comparing the sensor value to the stored values.
Alternatively, sensors with builtin microship analysing smoke density is equally
acceptable.

The control panel shall maintain a moving average of the sensors' smoke
chamber value to automatically compensate (move the threshold) for dust and
dirty conditions that could affect detection operations. The system shall
automatically maintain constant smoke obscuration sensitivity for each sensor
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 8 of 25

(via the floating threshold) by compensating for environmental factors. The
smoke obscuration sensitivity shall be adjustable.

The system shall automatically indicate when an individual sensor needs
cleaning. When a sensor's average value reaches a predetermined value, a
"DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be audibly and visually indicated at the
control panel for the individual sensor. Additionally, the LED on the sensor base
shall glow steady giving a visible indication at the sensor location. If a "DIRTY
SENSOR" is left unattended, and its average value increases to a second
predetermined value, an "EXCESSIVELY DIRTY SENSOR" trouble condition shall be
indicated at the control panel for the individual sensor. To prevent false alarms,
these "DIRTY" conditions shall in no way decrease the amount of smoke
obscuration necessary for system activation.

The control panel shall continuously perform an automatic self-test routine on
each sensor which will functionally check sensor electronics and ensure the
accuracy of the values being transmitted to the control panel. Any sensor that
fails this test shall indicate a "SELF TEST ABNORMAL" trouble condition with the
sensor location at the control panel.

An operator at the control panel, having a proper access level, shall have the
capability to manually access the following information for each sensor:

a) primary status
b) device type
c) present average value
d) present sensitivity selected*
e) peak detection values*
f) sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
g) Values shall be in "percent of smoke obscuration" format so that the
operator requires no interpretation.

At least 1000 individually identified sensors as well as conventional initiating
device and indicating appliance circuits shall be supported within a single
control panel.

For increased smoke detection assurance, all individually addressed smoke
sensors shall be provided with alarm verification. Only a verified alarm shall
initiate the alarm sequence operation.

LED OPERATION

The alarm LED shall flash on the control panel until the alarm has been
acknowledged.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 9 of 25

Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received
from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control
panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm information.

A pulsing alarm tone shall occur until acknowledge.

Once acknowledged, this same LED shall latch on. A subsequent alarm received
from another zone after acknowledged shall flash the alarm LED on the control
panel and the panel display shall show the new alarm information.

A pulsing alarm tone shall occur until acknowledge.

ALARM VERIFICATION

The activation of any system smoke detector shall initiate an Alarm Verification
operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a
second alarm activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm
is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process
the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one minute
the system is to resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification is to operate
only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be
processed immediately. The alarm verification operation is to be selectable by
device.

The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times a zone
has gone into a verification mode.

Alarm verification zones shall have the capability of being divided into seven
different groups whereby only two verification zones from a group will confirm the
first activation and cause the panel to follow programmed alarm sequence.

MANUAL EVACUATION

A manual evacuation switch shall be provided to operate the systems alarm
indicating appliances. Other control circuits shall not be activated. However, a
true alarm shall be processed as described previously.

ALARM & TROUBLE CONDITIONS

Alarm and trouble conditions shall be immediately displayed on the control
panel front alphanumeric display. If more alarms or troubles are in the system the
operator may scroll to display new alarms. The system shall have an alarm list key
that will allow the operator to display all alarms, troubles, and supervisory service
conditions with the time of occurrence. This shall allow for the determination of
not only the most recent alarm but also may indicate the path that the fire is
taking.

SUPERVISION

All auxiliary manual controls shall be supervised so that all switches must be
returned to the normal automatic position to clear system trouble, particularly for
the AHU and pressurization fans.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 10 of 25

Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete panel readout to
indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit.

The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure
must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote
annunciator A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while
incoming power is present. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low
battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually
indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator.

The System Expansion Modules shall be electrically supervised for module
placement. Should a module become disconnected from the controls, the
system trouble indicator must illuminate and audible trouble signal must sound.

The system shall have provisions for disabling and enabling all circuits individually
for maintenance or testing purposes.

POWER REQUIREMENTS

230V AC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit shall be provided for
each panel.

The system shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the
entire system upon loss of normal 230 VAC power in a normal supervisory mode
for a period of twenty-four (24) hours with 30 minutes of alarm operation at the
end of this period. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby
batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operations
shall be automatic.

All circuits requiring system operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be
individually fused at the control panel.

Batteries shall be of the Sealed lead acid type with a minimum life expectancy of
10 years and mounted in suitable enclosure.

Additional features shall be:

a) Automatic dual rate charging
b) Ammeter and Voltmeter
c) Charger ON indication
d) Charger failure indication
e) High-rate indication
f) Battery voltage test points
g) Vents cabinet
h) Battery over current protection

MAIN FIRE ALARM COMMAND CENTRE.

The main fire alarm command centre shall have the same features specified
above, but it shall cater for all the circuit connected to it and shall communicate
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 11 of 25

with all the other stand alone panel with the possibility to control all sensors in the
complete system, acknowledge and silence an alarm.

The main fire alarm command centre shall be provided with a spare capacity.

Main fire alarm command centre shall also be connected to the BMS system for
alarm monitoring.

Main fire alarm command centre shall be connected to the BMS system for
communication with the stand alone fire alarm control panel of each building.

FIRE ALARM REPEATER PANEL

The fire alarm repeater panel shall consist of a LED and LCD display to
annunciate all display on the main fire alarm command centre, the panel does
not require to have any control feature.

ADDRESSABLE PERIPHERAL NETWORK

Communication with Addressable devices: The system must provide
communication with all initiating and control devices individually. All of these
devices are to be individually annunciated at the control panel.

Annunciation shall include the following conditions for each point:

a) Alarm
b) Trouble
c) Open
d) Short
e) Ground
f) Device Fail/Or Incorrect Device.

All addressable devices are to have the capability of being disabled or enabled
individually.

Addressable devices may be multidropped from a single pair of wires. Systems
that require factory reprogramming to add or delete devices are unacceptable.

FORMAT

The communication format must be a poll/response protocol to allow t-tapping
of the wire to addressable devices and be completely digital. A high degree of
communication reliability must be obtained by using parity data bit error
checking routines for address codes and check sum routines for the data
transmission protocol. Systems that do not utilize full digital transmission protocol
(i.e.; that may use time pulse width methods to transmit data etc.) will not be
acceptable since they are considered unreliable and prone to errors.

IDENTIFICATION OF ADDRESSABLE DEVICES

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 12 of 25

Each addressable device must be uniquely identified by an address code
entered on each device at time of installation. Hard wire addressable system
shall be preferred in order to maintain the integrity of the system.
Control pushbutton switches - for: alarm silence, alarm acknowledge, supervisory
reset, display time and up to (4) control keys for programmable operation
duplicating the control panel switches. A key enable deactivates the control
switches.

Tone alert - Duplicates the control panel tone alert during alarm & trouble
conditions:

System trouble LED

Power on LED

FIRE FIGHTERS TELEPHONE SYSTEM

System consist of Master Telephone set, Remote Telephone sets, Remote master
telephone, Telephone interface modules, power supply, all required cabling,
control, pull boxes, terminations etc

Master telephone set along with the required no. of telephone interface
modules, LED/LCD indication, control switches, power supply etc shall be part of
the main fire alarm control panel located in the ground floor.

One no. remote master telephone shall be provided at a location to consultant
approval.

System shall provide two way communication between Master and remote fire
fighters telephones. It shall be a 100 % reliable system suitable for application
during active fire fighting conditions, fire alarm investigation, fire alarm system
inspection and testing.

The Master telephone connects directly into a telephone interface module. A
push to talk switch provides the operator with voice input control . Master
telephone uses local LED/LCD indication and switch module to select telephone
circuits and to silence any subsequent call ins until selected.

Remote telephone can call into the master by either being taken off hook or by
plugged into a telephone jack provided for the purpose.

There shall be ring in tone with a visible LED/LCD indicator for each telephone
circuit, and a switch control to select the calling telephone circuit.

Telephone circuits shall be supervised for opens, shorts, and overload conditions.
The master telephone shall be supervised for broken cord or off hook.

Remote telephones shall be provided as cabinet mounted. Each hears a ring
tone when a call in is selected and a hold tone when placed on hold.

System shall be wired in class A configuration. Size and type of cabling shall be as
per system manufacturers recommendations and to consultant approval.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 13 of 25

FIRE FIGHTERS SMOKE CONTROL STATION (FSCS)

Fire fighters smoke control station (FSCS) shall be part of the fire alarm control
panel and shall be located at the fire control room.

The control station shall include the following features:

a) The fire fighters smoke control station shall provide full monitoring and
manual control capability over all smoke control systems and equipment.

b) Equipment shall include but not limited to the following:

i. Smoke Extract Fans.
ii. Staircase Pressurization Fans
iii. Makeup Air Fans
iv. Motorized dampers of the various sub system including makeup
air ducts, smoke extract ducts etc.

c) The control station shall have the highest priority control over all smoke
control systems and equipment. Where manual controls are also
provided at other building locations for control of smoke control systems,
the control mode selected from the FSCS should prevail. FSCS control
should override or bypass other building controls such as hand off auto
and start/stop switches located on fan motor controllers, and controls
intended to protect against electrical overloads, provide for personnel
safety, and prevent major system damage.

d) The fire fighters smoke control station shall contain a building diagram
that clearly indicates the type and location of all smoke control
equipment (fans, dampers, etc.). The building areas affected by the
equipment shall also be clearly indicated.

e) The actual status of the systems and equipment that are activated or are
capable of activation for smoke control shall be clearly indicated at the
fire fighters smoke control station.

f) Status indication shall be provided for on and off status of each individual
fan used for smoke control. ON status should be sensed by pressure
difference as proof of airflow.

g) Contractor shall install all the required control and monitoring modules,
relays, for each contactors and power supply etc every system
components to be controlled.

h) Fire rated cables shall be used for the system installation.
PERIPHERAL DEVICES

The automatic fire detectors shall be fixed to the installation by mean of plug-in
bases.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 14 of 25

The two bases shall have a mechanical device enabling the base to be set to
accept only one of the four main type of detectors, i.e. ionisation smoke, optical
smoke, infra-red flame and heat.

The bases shall incorporate the optional feature of being able to lock the
detectors in place once plugged in.

The addressable base must incorporate all the electronics circuitry required for
communicating detector status to the Control Panel.

Addressable detectors and addressable modules shall be able to transmit to the
Control Panel a pre-set and unique identifier to detect unauthorised changes in
the system configuration.

The manufacturer shall have suitable equipment to test and replace all four main
types of automatic detectors.

The manufacturer shall have available intrinsically safe modules for automatic
detectors, the plug-in bases, line isolator & Interface modules.

Detectors with built in microchip complying with the performance specified
hereafter is equally acceptable.

PHOTO ELECTRIC DETECTORS

a) The photoelectric smoke detectors shall be capable of detecting smoke
from fires. The detectors shall have 360 degree smoke entry.

b) The Photo electric smoke detectors shall be U.L listed

c) The design of the optical smoke detectors sensing chamber shall be
optimised to minimise the effect of the dust deposits over a period of time

d) The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate screens designed to
prevent all but the very small insects from entering the sensing chamber.

e) The optical smoke detectors shall include RFI screening and feed-through
connecting components to minimise the effect of radiated and
conducted electrical interference.

f) The optical smoke detectors shall be incorporate an LED, clearly visible
from the outside, to provide indication of alarm actuation.

g) The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate a magnetically operated
functional test facility.

h) The optical smoke detectors shall have EMI/RFI shielded electrons.

i) The optical smoke detectors shall incorporate an LED clearly visible from
the outside, to provide indication of alarm and normal conditions.

HEAT DETECTORS
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 15 of 25

a) The heat detectors shall be capable of self restoring and providing rate of
rise and fixed temperature sensing.

b) The heat detectors shall be U.L listed

c) The heat detectors shall employ two heat-sensing elements with different
thermal characteristics to provide a rate of rise dependent response.

d) The temperature sensing elements and circuitry of the heat detectors
shall be coated with epoxy resin to provide environmental protection.

e) The heat detectors shall incorporate a magnetically operated functional
test facility.

f) The heat detectors shall have EMI/RFI shielded electrons.

g) The heat detectors shall incorporate an LED, clearly visible from the
outside, to provide indication of alarm and normal conditions.

MANUAL BREAK GLASS CALL POINT

a) The manual call points shall monitor and signal to the Control Panel the
status of a switch operated by a break glass assembly with N.O/N.C
contacts.

b) The manual call points shall be U.L approved.

c) The manual call points shall be capable of operating by means of thumb
pressure and not require a hammer.

d) The manual call points shall be field programmable to be alert or
evacuation.
e) The manual call points shall be capable of being tested using a special
key without the need for shattering the glass.

f) The addressable manual call points shall have built in electronics with dip
switch for addressing.

g) The conventional manual call points shall be connected to addressable
loop through interface modules.

h) The conventional break glass units to be provided in non-conditioned
areas such as workshop area and as shown on drawings.

ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE MODULES

a) The addressable contact interface module shall provide monitoring of the
status of switched input signals from either normally open contacts from
conventional devices.

b) The addressable contact monitoring module shall be capable of deriving
its power directly from the addressable loop or from the control panel.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 16 of 25

c) The addressable contact monitoring module shall be enclosed in a pre-
fabricated enclosure.

LINE ISOLATOR MODULE

a) The line isolator module shall provide protection on the addressable loop
by automatically disconnecting the section of wiring between two
modules where a short-circuit has occurred.

b) The line isolator module shall derive power directly from addressable loop

c) The line isolator module shall be installed for every 15 devices and as
shown in layout drawings.

CIRCUIT PROTECTOR

Circuit protector shall be provided on all fire alarm external wiring. To protect the
system against lightning or high transient voltage. The protector shall be located
as close as practicable to the point at which the circuit leave or enter a building.

The circuit protector shall have line to line response time of less than 1 nano
second and capable of accepting greater than 2000 Ampere at 28 volt.

BEAM DETECTOR

The Beam Detector shall be microprocessor based and shall have automatic
gain control and temperature compensation.

The separate transmitter/receiver shall be capable of long range coverage up to
100 Meter and have six sensitivity level settings.

The detector shall include normal, alarm and trouble LED indicators,

A remote indicator and test unit shall be installed at low level in the corridor to
indicate the status of the beam detector and which will be used to test the alarm
function of the detector.

PHOTOELECTRIC DUCT MOUNTED DETECTOR

Photoelectric duct sensors shall be of the solid state photoelectric type and shall
operate on the light scattering, photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance
alarms, detectors shall have a 30 mesh insect screen and be designed to ignore
invisible particles or smoke densities that are below the factory set point. No
radioactive material shall be used.

FIRE ALARM SOUNDER

a) The fire alarm sounder shall be U.L listed

b) The fire alarm sounder shall be wired directly from the panel in Multi
circuit.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 17 of 25

c) The fire alarm sounder circuits shall be complete with end of line resistors
for maintaining purpose.

d) The fire alarm sounder shall be of the light weight Aluminium alloy
construction, water proof and painted red.

e) The sounder shall be vibrating type with low current consumption

f) The sounder shall be 6 heavy duty suitable for internal and external
operation as required.

g) It shall give a minimum sound level of 90 dB at 1 meter.

h) The fire alarm sounder shall be controlled from the loop. Sequencing of
sounder controls, shall be determined during construction and can be
programmed at control panel.

j) Fire alarm sounder shall be addressable wherever indicated in the
drawing

FIRE ALARM SOUNDER WITH STROBE LIGHT

a) Audible/Visible notification appliance combines a high intensity strobe
with a low current electronic horn.

b) Horn output shall be a steady harmonically rich sound that can be easily
coded by the controlling notification appliance circuit.

c) 24V DC operation
d) UL listed or approved equal.
e) Strobe light shall be of xenon with impact resistant polycarbonate lens.
f) Strobe light intensity shall be selected from manufactures standard
product range depending on the location where it shall be installed and
the area coverage. It shall not be less than 30 candela.

g) It shall be of surface mounting/semi flush mounting.

h) Minimum sound level shall be as PE UL464.

TEMPERATURE

Control Panel : 0 C to 48 C

Peripheral Devices : 10 C to 50 C (For conventional devices).
0 C to 49 C (Addressable devices)

Humidity : 95%

Outdoor Equipment : IP65.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 18 of 25

2.0 VOICE EVACUATION SYSTEM

Fire alarm system of the main building shall be provided with a fully integrated
digital emergency voice evacuation system. System shall support up to eight
independent audio channels over a single pair of wires. System shall include but
not limited to the following:

a) Notification appliances such as ceiling speakers, wall mounted speakers,
speakers with strobes, etc

b) Distributed zoned audio amplifiers one for each speaker circuit

c) Paging microphone, digital message playback unit, Digital Audio
controllers, on board tone generators, all required audio zone control and
audio control input modules, power supply, battery etc in the main fire
control panels.

d) Switches, and LED indications for each speaker circuit zone to allow
emergency voice communication selection for Evacuation, Alert and
Paging, and all other switches/indications etc arranged on the fire alarm
control panel.

The system shall be capable of selecting the proper tones and phrases based
upon specific conditions and location, sort and transmit the audible information
and repeat the transmission as many times as required.

The system shall have the ability to generate pre-programmed digitized phrases,
words and alarm tones to all or specific areas of the building. The message
contained in the fully digitized message unit shall have the facility to be edited
and modified or even recorded in the field via a normal computer. System shall
have the capability of massage splicing. Massage splicing shall allow the system
to announciate specific zone and/or device numbers while system is in testing
mode, and shall also allow the system to announciate coded massages
informing the security personnel about the Fire Condition in specific zone or
device.

One-way communications of announcements and messages originating at the
Fire Control Room shall be via speakers located throughout the building. Speaker
shall be wired in class "A" for each floor. One dedicated amplifier shall be
available for each speaker circuit. Each Amplifier shall have its own
independent built-in back-up amplifier. The system shall have the ability to
automatically or manually sound the evacuation tone on the floor of alarm,
while at the same time being able to sound the first stage alert tone or voice
instruction to other areas of the building.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 19 of 25

The system shall be configured to allow voice paging. Upon activation of any
speaker manual control switch, the alarm tone shall be sounded over all
speakers in that group.
The control panel operator shall be able to make announcements via the push-
to-talk paging microphone over the pre-selected speakers.
Facility for total building paging shall be accomplished by the means of an All
Call switch.

MICROPHONE

The Microphones shall be a push-to-talk, dynamic noise canceling type with a
frequency response from 200 to 2,000 HZ. Any automatic alarm, which has been
in operation, shall be overridden by the use of the microphone. When the
manual voice announcements are completed the system shall revert back to the
previous alarm unless reset or restored to normal by authorities in charge.

AMPLIFIER

All amplifiers shall be sized to accommodate the speaker load plus an additional
20% spare per speaker zone to accommodate future addition. Minimum 2 watt
shall be considered for each speaker in sizing the amplifier.
Voltage ( 25V, 70.7V ) and power rating of the amplifiers shall be as per system
manufacturer recommendations. Size and type of power and control cables for
the speaker circuits shall be selected accordingly.

The amplifier shall be continuously supervised for proper operation. Each audio
power amplifier shall have integral audio signal de-multiplexes, allowing the
amplifier to select any one of eight digitized audio channels. The channel
selection shall be directed by the system software. Up to 8 multiple and different
audio signals must be able to broadcast simultaneously from the same system
network panel.

Amplifiers shall have built-in Back-up amplifier. Incase of Primary amplifier failure,
speakers circuits shall automatically gets connected to back-up amplifier and
system operation continues without interruption. In the event of a total loss of
audio data communications, all amplifiers will default to the local "HORN" tone. If
the local panel has an alarm condition, then all amplifiers will sound the Horn
signal on their connected speaker circuits. Audio amplifiers shall automatically
detect a short circuit condition on the connected speaker circuit wiring, and shall
inhibit itself from driving into that short circuit condition.

Frequency range: 200 Hz to 12 KHz

SPEAKERS

Ceiling recessed speakers and wall mounted speakers shall be provided in the
corridors/common areas as indicated in the relevant drawings.

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 20 of 25

All speakers shall be listed to UL1480. The speakers shall have taps for , , 1,
and 2 watts. Multiple tap speaker having taps up to 4 watt shall be provided if
required.

All speakers shall have high impact, flame retardant housings. Ceiling speakers
shall be of white/off white, and wall mounted speakers shall be of white or red to
local authority approval.

Frequency response: 400 Hz to 4000Hz or better

Sound Pressure Level at 1W as per UL1480 test: 84 dBA at 10 feet

Humidity 95%

Temperature range 0 to 40 degree C

SPEAKER / STROBE

It combines a multi tapped speaker ( as specified above ) and an individually
addressed strobe to provide audio/tone notification and visible notification from
the same unit.

Speaker with strobe shall be provided as indicated in the relevant drawings.
Speaker/strobes shall have a synchronized strobe light with multiple candela taps
in addition to the speaker having characteristics specified above. The strobe light
taps shall be adjustable for 15/75,30/75, 75 and 110 candela. When activated,
the strobe shall flash at a synchronized rate

It shall be UL listed to standard 1971, and standard 1480.

Temperature range: 0 to 50 degree C

Humidity 93%

High impact, flame retardant housing and shall be red or white to local authority
requirements.

Speakers shall be wired separately from the addressable strobe wiring.

AUDIO CONTROLLER INPUT MODULES

System Audio Controller shall have the Input modules to interface with
Background Music Inputs. System will be used for normal Public Address
operation during normal hours. In case of Fire Alarm, all background music inputs
will be muted and highest priority Evacuation massage will be transmitted to
area of Fire and Alert Messages to other areas. Each input shall be provided with
volume control to control the input level of background music sources.

3.0 GRAPHIC COMMAND CENTER

A colour graphic command center shall be installed in control room. When a fire
alarm status changes, colour graphics shall display an indication of the type of
alarm or other activity and its location. The operator then uses the mouse control
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 21 of 25

to access a more detailed view of the alarmed zone or device. With proper
access code, the operator shall be able to acknowledge alarm conditions,
silence audible alarms and extinguish visible notification appliances, and perform
system reset directly from the colour graphic screens. GCC shall accommodate
upto 4 network card and each network capable of accomodating upto 99
notes.

The graphic command center shall use IBM compatible PC The PC shall have a
Pentium IV processor operating at 2 GHz minimum, 512 MB RAM, 40GB HDD and
a 17" SVGA monitor with graphics hardware acceleration. The PC and
Peripherals shall be from manufacturer such as Dell, Compaq etc. Locally
assembled equipment will not be accepted.

It shall provide history logging upto 400,000 historical events, on line A4 laser
printer capable of printing at a speed of at least 10ppm. Graphics shall also be
exchanged to control workstation.
4.0 INSTALLATION

Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications,
all applicable codes, local authority requirements and the manufacturer's
recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the
provisions of NEC - Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling
Circuits or if required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in
accordance with NEC-Article 760 A and B. Upon completion, the contractor shall
so certify in writing to the Consultant and general contractor. All junction boxes
shall be sprayed red and labeled "Fire Alarm". Wiring colour code shall be
maintained throughout the installation.

Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract
shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.

The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of
the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation.

The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on site supervision of
installation.
TYPE OF CABLES

Fire resistant FP200 cables complying with BS 6387 Category CWZ shall be used
for the wiring of the fire alarm system. The cabling shall be carried out in class A
configuration. Cable running through walls, ceilings, roofs etc shall be provided
with fire stops.
CABLING AND WIRING

The installation of all wiring, cable and equipment shall be in accordance with
NFPA 70. National Electric Code and specifically with Article 760, Fire Protection
signaling systems and in accordance with the local codes and standards.

Wiring for the fire detection and alarm system shall be segregated from all
lighting and power systems.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 22 of 25

Wiring within any control equipment shall be readily accessible without removing
any components or parts.

All internal fire alarm cabling shall be fire resistant FP 200 cables or equal.

Wiring for 240 V AC power to each FCP shall be minimum 2.5 mm
2
. Wiring for all
bell circuits shall be minimum 2.5 mm
2
and wiring for all signaling circuits shall be
minimum 1.5 mm
2
.

Wiring between FCPs and ACPs shall be minimum 2.5 mm
2
and shall be
armoured.

Wiring between FCPs for networking shall be 1.5 mm
2
twisted pairs cables.

Wiring for the telephone circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm twisted.

Wiring for the speaker circuits shall be minimum 1.5 sq.mm twisted and shall meet
UL 2196 requirements.

All cabling shall be concealed in the building fabric for all conditioned areas.

Fire alarm system cables shall be installed using PVC conduits embedded in the
slab/wall. All surface mounted installation shall be using GI conduits.

Exposed installation of fire alarm system cable is not acceptable.

Where cables pass through walls or floors, then shall be protected by galvanized
steel sleeves.
5.0 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

PRELIMINARY TESTS

Upon the completion of the installation, the system shall be subject to functional
and operation performance tests including test of each installed initiating and
notification appliance. Tests shall include the meggering of all system conductors
to determine that the system is free from grounded, shorted or open circuits.
The megger test shall be conducted prior to the installation of fire alarm
equipment. If deficiencies are found corrections shall be made and the system
shall be retested to assure that it functions.

ACCEPTANCE TEST

Provide the service of competent, factory trained Engineer or technician
authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically
supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and commissioning of the
system. Testing shall be in full accordance with NEPA 72 Section 7.2.2 :

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 23 of 25

a) Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections
and test for short circuits, earth faults, continuity and insulation.

b) Verify activation of all flow switches.

c) Open initiating device circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.

d) Open signaling line circuits and verify that the fault signal actuates.

e) Open and short indicating appliance circuits and verify that fault signal
actuates.

f) Earth initiating device circuits and verify response of fault signals.

g) Earth signaling line circuits and verify response of fault signals.

h) Earth indicating appliance circuits and verify response of fault signals.

i) Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.

j) Check installation, supervision and operation of all intelligent smoke
sensors during a walk test.

k) Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should
be introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper
processing of the signal at the Fire Panel and the correct activation of
the control points.

CONDUCTOR TESTING

Prior to connection of the equipment all conductors shall be tested in the
following manner.

Verify absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors.

Insulation test : To ensure that all conductor other than those intentionally
connected together and completely isolated.

SYSTEM TESTING

Verify that the control unit is in the normal supervisory condition as detailed in the
manufacturers manual.

Test each initiating device and indicating appliance for alarm operation and
trouble indication.

Test the operation of control module for proper response

Test all primary power supplies.

Test all secondary power supply

FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 24 of 25

Verify that each test signal is properly reported and received at the main fire
alarm panel.

Functional tests to verify the interfacing details with all other systems as described
in item 1.2.description of works and confirm whether the interfacing logic and
sequence of operation is as per Consultant approved programme.

Fire Alarm Schedule to be completed by the Vendor during tender. One
schedule to be completed for each panel

Control Panel Features Response
Operators Panel:
LCD
Keypad
Programmable Control Keys
Supervisory LED
Printer

Total I/O Point Capacity
Conventional Circuits:
Initiating Circuits
Indicating Appliance
Auxiliary Relay with built in feedback

No. of Loops
Number
Distance (Style 4)
Addressable points

Meters
System
Battery

Industry Listings
UL 864 (fire)
NFPA 72 Series
FM

Software Features
Field configurable
Passcode levels
Custom labels
Time Control
Alarm verification by group

One man walk test by group silent with
log with zone indication

Historical log alarm events
trouble events

Trouble reminder programmable

Addressable Devices Feature:
Detectors
Photoelectric
Heat
Duct

Analog
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

Page 25 of 25

Control Panel Features Response
Address Location
Base
Interchangeable heads
W/alarm LED
W/remote LED output
W/auxiliary relay
W/sounder

Manual Station
Control Modules
Isolator Module

CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM

Page 1 of 17

SECTION 16



Page 2 of 17

SECTION 16


INDEX

1.0 CCTV SYSTEM


Page 3 of 17

1.0 CCTV MONITORING SYSTEM

1.1 IP CAMERA DOME FEATURES

The IP camera dome shall transmit high quality video across the network for remote
viewing and recording. It shall be powered by a proprietary digital video management
system.

The dome shall have a maximum video transmission rate of 30 fps (25 fps PAL) at 640 x
480 pixels (768 x 576 PAL).

The dome shall use optimized proprietary compression based on MPEG4 that optimizes
data and maximizes picture quality.

Simultaneous transmission of multiple channel video across the LAN and WAN (Internet)
to connected network digital video recorders and master workstations shall be
provided.

The dome shall be configurable remotely from network digital video recorders and
master workstations.

Single channel audio for communications and recording shall be provided.

The dome shall be capable of 5 simultaneous viewing/recording streams per camera.
Museum Search (Smart Search) feature shall scan hours of video in minutes.

MD5 128-bit algorithm video authentication shall ensure data integrity.

The LAN interface shall be 100 Mbps, TCP/IP Unicast.

Video Bandwidth shall be 1.5 Mbps (per video stream), nominal.

Up to 16 cameras shall be able to be displayed on a remote workstation.

Adjustment of fps according to network performance capability shall not sacrifice
quality.

Control of operation and recording from a macro shall be available.

Levels of user authorization for different functions shall be provided.

Remote software updates for the camera dome and the IP version shall be available.

Watch dog option shall cause a reboot when system is not responding.

PTZ control from application over Ethernet shall be provided.

Alarm report shall be able to run a response macro. External alarms shall be provided.

DHCP support shall be provided.


Page 4 of 17

Definition of movement in a specific area (region-of-interest) from a workstation shall
available.

Video motion detection shall be provided.

An embedded self-supported OS shall be provided.

1.2 Standard Indoor Camera Dome Features

The motorized dome shall have internal CPU-circuitry that shall provide for an external
power supply input, four alarm inputs, one relay output and communications wiring. On-
board memory shall be retained in the housing; installation and servicing shall be easy.

Alarm inputs shall be individually programmable for their functional state (enabled or
disabled), reporting state (report on or off), active state (high or low), acknowledge
mode (manual, momentary or automatic), automatic acknowledge dwell time control,
set and reset action (action when triggered or reset) and displayed title text. The relay
output shall be programmable for its power-on state (on or off), output type (momentary
or latching) and displayed title text.

Programmable titling shall be provided for the camera and every preset position, alarm,
relay, and sector.
Titles shall be enabled or disabled individually or globally. The overall position of the titles
and display frame position shall be programmable. The capability to fade titles after a
programmable time shall be provided.

There shall be 79 programmable preset positions available, each having a variable
preset solve speed of 1 sec (nominal) and accuracy of 0.23. The dome's 360 degree
view shall be programmable for a maximum of 16 sectors. Each sector shall have the
capability to be blanked out (no video display). The number and size of sectors shall be
programmable and have a custom title.

There shall be four tours available with 32 steps per tour. Tour steps shall include preset
positions with speed control, relay control, alarm acknowledge, save/recall camera
status, repeat tour, call another tour, call an autotour and dwell timing control.

Pan and tilt functions shall be externally controlled, continuously variable and
programmable to be enabled or disabled manual pan limits shall be programmable.
There shall be an autopan feature and it shall be programmable for its functional
settings (enabled, disabled speed, limits). Maximum manual pan and tilt speeds shall be
programmable. Maximum pan speed shall be 120 degrees/sec and maximum tilt speed
shall be 90 degrees/sec. Pan and tilt speeds shall also be scalable to the zoom setting.
The zoom function speed shall be externally controlled using three settings, low, medium
and high.

The camera-lens module shall be a 1/4 inch, high-resolution color type. Camera
sensitivity shall be 0.2 lux. The lens on the standard cameras shall have a maximum
optical zoom setting of 22X and a maximum digital zoom setting of 12X for a total zoom
setting of 264X. Lens focal length shall be 4-88 mm with a maximum aperture of f/1.6. The
digital zoom shall be programmable for its functional setting (enable/disable). An autoiris
function with a manual override feature and an auto-focus function with functional
setting control (enable/disable) shall also be provided.


Page 5 of 17

In addition, the camera shall provide high level, programmable functions. The autoiris
shall be adjustable. The shutter speed shall be automatic or manual. The automatic
shutter speed shall work with an auto exposure feature. This feature can be set to
operate with a fully automatic shutter speed or a fixed, selectable, linear speed. These
features are called exposure priority or shutter priority. All color cameras shall have white
balance gain using red and blue scales. Backlight compensation shall be
programmable for its relative setting using a tuning value scale. Video line locking shall
be provided with an internal crystal clock or a programmable vertical phase scale.

The basic ceiling mounted version shall be designed to mount into any dropped or hard
ceiling having the capacity to support the dome's weight. There shall be an optional
mounting kit for ceilings not able to support the dome's weight.

The indoor pendant version shall be mounted using a molded thermoplastic housing and
1-1/2 inch NPT threaded fitting.

A real time clock shall be available.
Multilanguage menu system shall be provided, including English, and Arabic.

The camera dome system shall have the following mechanical specifications:

1. Dimensions: Indoor Ceiling
Diameter: 7.1-in. (180 mm).
Height: 9.7-in. (246 mm).
Indoor Pendant
Height: 10.0-in. (254 mm).
2. Weight: Indoor Ceiling: 5.1 lb (2.3 kg).
Indoor Pendant: 4.7 lb (2.1 kg).
Construction: Plastic, aluminum and steel.
4. Color: White housing, black trim ring, gray (smoked), chrome or gold dome for
the
indoor version, clear dome for the outdoor version.

Environmental parameters shall be: 32 to 132 F (0 to 55 C).

1.3 Day/Night Outdoor Camera Dome Features

The motorized dome shall have internal CPU-circuitry that shall provide for an external
power supply input, four alarm inputs, one relay output and communications wiring. On-
board memory shall be retained in the housing; installation and servicing shall be easy.

Alarm inputs shall be individually programmable for their functional state (enabled or
disabled), reporting state (report on or off), active state (high or low), acknowledge
mode (manual, momentary or automatic), automatic acknowledge dwell time control,
set and reset action (action when triggered or reset) and displayed title text. The relay
output shall be programmable for its power-on state (on or off), output type (momentary
or latching) and displayed title text.

Programmable titling shall be provided for the camera and every preset position, alarm,
relay, and sector.


Page 6 of 17

Titles shall be enabled or disabled individually or globally. The overall position of the titles
and display frame position shall be programmable. The capability to fade titles after a
programmable time shall be provided.

There shall be 79 programmable preset positions available, each having a variable
preset solve speed of 1 sec (nominal) and accuracy of 0.23. The dome's 360 degree
view shall be programmable for a maximum of 16 sectors. Each sector shall have the
capability to be blanked out (no video display). The number and size of sectors shall be
programmable and have a custom title.

There shall be eight tours available with 32 steps per tour. Tour steps shall include preset
positions with speed control, relay control, alarm acknowledge, save/recall camera
status, repeat tour, call another tour, call an autotour and dwell timing control. There
shall be two autotours available with 256 pan, tilt and zoom functions per autotour.
Timing shall be dynamic or as is actually programmed with the joystick and push buttons.

Pan and tilt functions shall be externally controlled, continuously variable and
programmable to be enabled or disabled manual pan limits shall be programmable.
There shall be an autopan feature and it shall be programmable for its functional
settings (enabled, disabled speed, limits). Maximum manual pan and tilt speeds shall be
programmable. Maximum pan speed shall be 360 degrees/sec and maximum tilt speed
shall be 150 degrees/sec. Pan and tilt speeds shall also be scalable to the zoom setting.
The zoom function speed shall be externally controlled using three settings, low, medium
and high.

The camera-lens module shall be a 1/4 inch, high-resolution color type. Camera
sensitivity shall be 0.0019 fc (0.02 lux). The lens on the day/night cameras shall have a
maximum optical zoom setting of 23X and a maximum digital zoom setting of 12X for a
total zoom setting of 276. Lens focal length shall be 3.6-82.8 mm, with a maximum
aperture of f/1.6. The digital zoom shall be programmable for its functional setting
(enable/disable). An autoiris function with a manual override feature and an auto-focus
function with functional setting control (enable/disable) shall also be provided. The 23X
camera shall feature wide dynamic range to provide the highest quality image with
excellent contrast.

In addition, the camera shall provide high level, programmable functions. The autoiris
and AGC shall be adjustable. The shutter speed shall be automatic or manual. The
automatic shutter speed shall work with an auto exposure feature. This feature can be
set to operate with a fully automatic shutter speed or a fixed, selectable, linear speed.
These features are called exposure priority or shutter priority. All color cameras shall have
white balance gain using red and blue scales. Backlight compensation shall be
programmable for its relative setting using a tuning value scale. Video line locking shall
be provided with an internal crystal clock or a programmable vertical phase scale.

The outdoor pendant model shall be mounted using a die cast aluminum housing and
1-1/2 inch NPT threaded fitting and shall include a molded thermoplastic sunshield and
additional environmental control.

A real time clock and scheduler shall be available on all models. Up to 64 events shall
be able to be scheduled for action at a programmed time of day. Events that may be
scheduled include a preset, turning a relay on or off, enabling or disabling an alarm, and
calling a tour or an autotour


Page 7 of 17

16 individual zoom-scalable programmable privacy masks shall be available.

Programmable azimuth and compass display shall be available. The compass shall be
programmed for absolute North and shall display 8 compass headings (N, NE, E, SE, S,
SW, W, NW). Pan and tilt degrees shall be displayed with a 1 resolution.

Motion detection capability shall be available for the day/night camera. For each
preset, there are 6 programmable zones for motion detection. Each zone has 3 sensitivity
levels. Programmable actions may be associated with each detection zone, including
calling another preset, turning a relay on or off, and calling a tour or an autotour.

The capability to freeze an image during a preset solve shall be available on the
day/night cameras. The control shall be global and affect all preset solves. The freeze of
an image during solve has advantages when recording using a motion compensated
recording system (DVR).

The capability to flip (invert) the video image shall be available on the day/night
cameras. This feature is useful when mounting units in an inverted position. All pan/tilt
and compass displays are automatically adjusted for the inverted image.

Multilanguage menu system shall be provided, including English, and Arabic.

The camera dome system shall have the following mechanical specifications:
1. Dimensions: Outdoor Pendant
Height: 10.3-in. (262 mm).
Lower Dome
2. Weight: Outdoor Pendant: 7.7 lb (3.5 kg).
3. Construction: Plastic, aluminum and steel.
4. Color: White housing, black trim ring, clear dome for the outdoor
version.

Environmental parameters shall be: -29 to 165 F (-34 to 74 C) in accordance with NEMA
2.1.5.1 STD 2; -40 to 132 F (-40 to 55 C) continuous rotation.

Indoor, In-Ceiling, Color Fixed-Position Camera Domes

The fixed camera dome shall incorporate a fixed camera and auto iris varifocal lens
combination. The camera domes shall be available for indoor in-ceiling mounting
configurations. A smoked lower dome shall be included.

The camera position shall have a four direction adjustment, allowing for adjustment of
pan, tilt, vertical height in the dome and lens rotation (roll), for any angle of view
required.

The color camera shall accept 24 VAC power input and shall offer line lock capability.

The camera shall be a 1/3-inch format CCD camera.

The color cameras shall have 540 TV lines resolution and 0.019 fc (0.2 lux) sensitivity.


Page 8 of 17

All cameras shall have electronic shutter and shall be fitted with a 3-6 mm auto iris
varifocal lens.

Input Voltage : 13-28 VAC (24 VAC nominal), Non-isolated.
Current Rating : 300 mA at 24 VAC.
Power Consumption : 7.2 W.
Connectors : Power: 3-pin terminal block. Video: BNC,
Video Output Impedance : 75 ohms.
Scanning System : CCIR/PAL: 625 lines, 50 fields/sec.
R. F. Emission Rating : FCC Class A.
Tilt & Horizontal Adjustment : 4 axis adjustment, pan, tilt, vertical height and roll
Construction : Plastic and steel.
Operating Temp. Range : 35 to 104 F (2 to 40 C).
Operating Humidity : Up to 90% relative, noncondensing.
Image Device : 1/3" ExView CCD, 2:1 interlace,
Resolution (TV lines) : 460
Sensitvity fc (lux) : 0.019 (0.2) at 25 IRE, f/1.2
Electronic Iris (sec) : 1/60 (1/50)-1/100,000
Signal-to-Noise Ratio : >48 dB (AGC off)
Focal Length (mm) : 3-6 varifocal with auto iris

1.4. Fixed IP Cameras

The camera shall be a 1/4-inch solid-state high-resolution color video camera using an
interline transfer charge-coupled device (CCD) image sensor with DSP (Digital Signal
Processing).

The television operating system available shall be PAL.

The pickup device shall have over 437,000 pixel array (752 horizontal, 582 vertical).
RJ-45 Ethernet connector for connection to the Ethernet network directly.

It shall be compatible with auto-iris lenses with self-contained auto iris control circuits and
provide screw terminals for cable connection to this type of lens. It also shall have an
internal auto iris control circuit for use with DC-drive auto iris lenses and shall provide a
built-in connector for this lens type.

It shall accept lenses having both C- and CS-type mounts.

Camera mounting provisions shall include a 1/4-20 threaded hole. Top and bottom
mounting shall be provided.

Horizontal resolution shall be 540 TV lines.

Signal-to-noise ratio shall be greater than 48 dB (AGC off).

A gray scale of 256 shall be provided.

The camera shall incorporate a color balance sensor which reads the color temperature
of the light through the lens. Through-the-lens white balance for color temperatures shall
be automatic (3000 - 7000 K).


Page 9 of 17

The electronic iris control mode shall be an automatic linear shutter 1/50 to 1/100,000
sec.

At an output level of usable video (25 IRE), the camera shall have a sensitivity of 0.035 fc
(0.38 lux) at standard gain and 0.02 fc (0.42 lux) at high gain. (Conditions: scene
illumination, f/1.2 lens, 89.9% scene highlight reflectance.)

Backlight compensation shall be switch-selectable on or off.

Synchronization shall be power lines phase locking (line-locking) with vertical phase
adjustment or internal crystal.

The camera shall conform to the radiation standards of FCC Class A and IEC1146-1
standard for non-broadcast signal-sensor cameras.

Input power for the camera shall be 24 V, 60 Hz (NTSC) or 24 V, 50 Hz (PAL) with entry
through a screw terminal block. Power consumption shall not exceed 4 W.

1.5 Outdoor Fixed Camera

Outdoor cameras shall have identical specifications to the indoor units, but shall be
enclosed in weatherproof housings and installed on suitable mounts.

1.6 Lenses

All lenses on fixed cameras shall be 1/3 inch format varifocal lenses with Auto iris to
assure a good video image regardless of changes in scene illumination. Focal length of
the lens shall be field selectable and shall vary between 3.5 - 8mm.

1.7 Digital Video Recording Management and Network Software

The Digital Video Recording and Management Network Software shall meet the
requirements of business and government surveillance applications. The software shall
be unique and power a line of Digital Video Recorders, Servers and Workstations. The
Software shall be available on CD-R format and provide a complete and
comprehensive application for the operation and maintenance of the video
surveillance system. It shall provide full live digital video and audio surveillance over a
standard 100Base-T network by the use of a GUI incorporating video display areas,
toolbars, control palettes, and site/device trees.

The Software shall also be available preloaded in a Workstation. This workstation shall be
a preconfigured state-of-the-art PC ready to review and record video over the LAN and
WAN (Internet), with proper registration.

The software shall offer network connectivity to other family components that share all
video and control data over the Ethernet network. The number of network-connected
components is only limited to the number of assigned IP addresses.

The software, without any degradation to video quality, shall simultaneously offer:

16-Channel continuous video playback.

16-Channel video playback transmission to the Ethernet network.

Page 10 of 17

16-Channel continuous video receiving from the Ethernet network.

User selectable video archiving of pre-existing recording.

The operating system of the software shall be Microsoft WindowsXP Professional.

Network Setup: Standard network protocol type using IP addressing scheme.
Site Authorization: Workstation can be setup using remote recorder or workstation GUI.
Site name and authorization can be established by User and Group. Permissions can be
assigned for all system functions.

Macro Create & Edit: System macros can be added, edited, and deleted using the
recorder's cameras and detectors. In addition, within macros, alarms can be sent and
remote macros run.

Alarm Setup: Recorder alarms can be established by adding detectors and configuring
motion detection on video. The triggering of the recorder's detectors is used to send
alarms to remote units. In addition, detectors can be edited and deleted.

Device Settings: The Server's cameras, microphones and sensors can be named.
Cameras can be setup as PTZ types and full descriptions can be assigned.

Authentication: The video from the recorder's cameras can be enabled to view the
Authentication status symbol (A) on the displayed video.

The software shall employ a compression algorithm based on:

Optimized MPEG4 and JPEG.

User selectable resolution (quality) not requiring a need to restart the application or the
digital video recorder. It shall be selectable using a 4-position bar, from the Main Screen.
There shall be 4 levels of resolution (Frame, Field, CIF, and HCIF) with 2 levels of
compression (Normal, Full) comprising 8 quality levels total, which shall be accessible
from the Setup menu selections.

The networked system shall be comprised of:

The software platform.

Recorders.

Workstations.

The software installed in both recorders and workstations shall be similar in:

Graphical User Interface, therefore an operator shall need to learn only one interface for
both control and programming of the system.

Functions, offering the ability to remotely configure most system components from any
recorder or workstation.


Page 11 of 17

The software shall offer features including the simultaneous display, playback, distribution
and archive of multiple channel video and audio. It shall collect multiple channels of
analog video and digitize them for the purpose of display, archive and requested
distribution across the Ethernet network. Cameras, microphones and sensors shall be the
primary analog input devices. Each channel of video and audio data shall have the
capability of being displayed, played back, distributed and archived simultaneously
across several servers and clients across the network. Each sensor channel shall support
a NO or NC device. The software shall also have full WAN and Internet capability,
offering expandability beyond a corporate LAN.

Authorization rights setup shall be performed using the Site Authorization screen. Group
rights shall be available to configure, by specific site. Rights shall provide authority to
perform all system functions. The software shall offer a full multi-user authorization process
as follows:

User groups shall be created once globally and shall function in all components
connected to the network.

Users shall be created once globally and shall be given rights to particular groups.

Groups shall be authorized and given specific access to each unit, permitting "function-
specific" profiles.

Users created and authorized for each machine shall be able to login to any recorder
and workstation and automatically have their group rights for that machine follow them.

There shall be no virtual limit on the number of Groups and Users that can be authorized
in the software.

The software shall allow for each group to be authorized or denied access, per
component, to:

Login.
Logout.
Setup:
Network Setup & Site Name.
User and Group Management.
Site Authorization.
Auto Login.
Macro - Create & Edit.
Alarm Setup.
Authentication Settings.
Device Setup.
Pre & Post Alarm.
Storage Database Utilities.
Auto Record.
Exit to OS.
RS-232 Setup.
Priority Setup.
Registration Setup.
Manual Record Setup.
Scheduler for Macros.


Page 12 of 17

Reports.
Scheduler/Macro.
Shutdown/Close.
Record.
Stop.
Change Quality.
Picture.
Export.
Print.
Controls.
Live View.
Playback.
PTZ

All users created shall be able to Login to any workstation on the system. A user, given
appropriate access, shall be able to remotely configure all components connected to
the network. The programming shall include the complete operation of the recorders,
including but not limited to:

Camera titles.
Alarm conditions.
System reports.
PTZ Control.
Relays.
Alarms.

The Main Window shall provide the following:

The Site and Device Tree depicting all recorders, servers and workstations connected to
the network.

Within the Site and Device Tree, each unit shall be depicted with all connected devices
such as:

Cameras connected, differentiating between PTZ and fixed cameras.
Microphones.

A multiscreen display area that allows for screen displays of:

Single Camera.
Quad.
3 x 3.
4 x 4.
6 way.
Full screen of any of the above selected multi screens shall allow for the viewing of the
particular multiscreen in full screen mode by hiding the graphical user interface.

PTZ Controls:

When a dome camera is selected, an operator shall be able to :

Control pan, tilt, zoom, iris and focus.
Execute preset positions.

Page 13 of 17

Program preset positions.
Complete programming of menus embedded in the selected dome.
All PTZ programming and control shall be achieved remotely without requiring an
operator to be present at the recorder the PTZ camera is connected to.
PTZ control shall be performed dynamically onscreen, not requiring an operator to click
on arrows to move the PTZ camera.
The PTZ control shall be fully variable by dynamically moving the cursor across the video
display.

Access to all programming menus.

User selectable resolution shall include capture sizes of:

320 x 120 pixels, 384 x 144, PAL.
320 x 240 pixels, 384 x 288, PAL.
640 x 240 pixels, 768 x 288, PAL.
640 x 480 pixels, 768 x 576, PAL.

On-demand recording of video currently viewed shall allow for the recording of any
camera from any recorder connected to the network.

The Site and Device Tree shall provide a physical list of all known network site areas and
connected cameras, PTZ cameras and microphones. The cameras, PTZ cameras and
microphones shall be represented by graphical symbols. Components in the Site and
Device Tree shall be selectable and configurable. PTZ controls shall offer:

When a dome camera is selected, an operator shall be able to:

Control Pan, Tilt, Zoom, Iris and Focus.
Execute preset positions.
Program preset positions.
Complete programming of menus embedded in the selected dome.
All PTZ programming and control shall be achieved remotely without requiring an
operator to be physically located at the recorder the PTZ is connected to.
PTZ control shall be performed on the video screen without the need for an operator to
click on any arrows depicting direction of the device to be moved.
The PTZ control shall be fully variable and shall permit an operator to obtain higher pan
and tilt speeds by simply clicking-and-dragging the mouse cursor on the video screen.

Viewing of live cameras shall be performed by:

Clicking on the desired camera in the Site and Device Tree.

"Drag-and-drop" operations of cameras from the Site and Device Tree to the
appropriate multiscreen space.

"Drag-and-drop" operation of the recorder from the Site and Device Tree to the
appropriate multiscreen space.

The software shall permit viewing of live video from:

Any camera connected to any recorder on the network.


Page 14 of 17

The software shall allow for duplicate recording over the network.

All workstations shall be able to simultaneously record:

All cameras physically connected to recorders at a maximum of:

240 fps at 640 x 480 pixel resolution, 768 x 576, PAL (depending on the recorder utilized).

The Navigator Window shall graphically display recorded video. It shall contain all
function buttons necessary to access the video on-screen. These functions include but
are not limited to:

A scalable timeline shall be available to define "from" and "to" time/date intervals of
video and audio.

Cameras and microphones shall be selected from the Navigator Tree and displayed in
the timeline.

The display mode shall be selected from a palette to configure the number of cameras
played back.

A "Create AVI" button shall be used to create an AVI type file of the selected single
camera video segment.

A "Museum Search" button shall be available to search selected video segments for
"Area of Interest" AOI events using a scalable sensitivity setting.

A Play button shall be available to display the Main Window with the Video Display Area
containing the selected video segments ready for review.

Video retrieval in the Navigator Window shall be performed by:

Selecting the Display Mode for required number of cameras.

Selecting the device (recorder or workstation) that video was previously stored on or
archived to.

Selecting the cameras and microphones to be played back.

By "Drag-and-Drop", similar to the live view, selected cameras and microphones are
inserted into the multiscreen displays so that an operator can view a mix of previously
recorded cameras and live video on the same screen.

The timeline shall provide a graphical interface depicting color-coded bars that indicate
video previously recorded as well as all alarmed video and audio.

Any recorders on the network shall be capable of playing back, by utilizing the
multiscreen displays, a mix of videos previously recorded on any other server on the
network, or archived.

The Navigator Window shall offer the ability to playback cameras:

One by one.

Page 15 of 17

Time synchronized (precise timeline the cameras were recorded in).

Access to programming and more advanced screens shall be done by means of an
immobile, permanently docked toolbar located on the top live screen. The Toolbar shall
provide access to the following major functionality of the system:

The Scheduler/Macro.
Reports.
Setup.
Logout and Shutdown buttons.

The software shall provide an advanced method for creating and executing extensive
software commands. This shall be achieved by the use of macros. Macro configuration
shall be defined for recorded cameras and microphones, command duration, recording
location, local viewing, device ID, picture quality, refresh mode, recording rate (fps),
related devices (sensors) and alarm activation.

Macros shall allow an authorized user to create and schedule software commands that
shall include but are not limited to:

Sequencing cameras, including multiscreen displays, in a local and remote recorder.

Execute remote macros existing on recorders currently connected to the network.

Record cameras at different qualities and frame rates from any recorder on the network.

Send alarm condition to any recorder and workstation on the network. By the use of
macros, an authorized user shall be able to program the destination component of the
alarm condition.

An authorized user shall be able to program and execute macros remotely without the
need to be physically located at the recorder that the macros will be programmed on.

The Schedule/Macro button, shall allow the running of preconfigured combinations of
camera, sensor and PTZ programmed routines.

Macro scheduling shall include but is not limited to:

Days of the week when a macro is active.

Start and end time for when a macro is active.

If a macro is to run continuously or not.

A macro shall be able to run every:

5 min, 10 min, 1/4 Hour, 1/2 Hour, 3/4 Hour, 1 Hour, 2 Hours, 3 Hours, 4 Hours, 6 Hours, 8
Hours, 12 Hours.
A macro shall be able to be scheduled to run for 1-256 cycles.

The network and sites configuration shall allow:


Page 16 of 17

Setup of a system Nucleus and Backup Nucleus. The Backup Nucleus shall act as the
hot-standby Nucleus in the event that the primary Nucleus goes offline, providing
uninterrupted system functionality. A Network Settings menu shall provide a
comprehensive worksheet for each networked device. When all units have been setup,
the resulting connected devices shall define the site.

Time synchronization of all components on the network.

All appropriate networking features including, each server IP, Subnet and Gateway.

Device configuration shall have the ability to be configured for system recognition and
operation. Valid devices shall be:

Cameras; fixed or with integrated PTZ.
Microphones.
Sensors.

All devices shall be assigned a unique ID number and title descriptor. PTZ cameras shall
be setup for RS-422 protocol and supported with existing manufacturer's drivers where
applicable.

Storage Database Utilities shall allow setup and usage of detected hard disks locally.
Any networked recorder, workstation or server shall be a candidate to add to the
picture database. Once established, any recorder shall use established hard disks for
recording data.

Authentication shall be configured using the Authentication Settings screen.
Authentication display shall be configured by site and affect the destination video. A
check box shall be available to enable video authentication and view the status of the
video generated. The video authentication scheme shall utilize a 128 bit MD5 algorithm.

The software shall be installed on an appropriate workstation computer running a
Microsoft Windows XP operating system. When installed and run, the application shall
display a Main Window and Login Window, where all configuration and operation
begins.

The login window shall consist of a User Name and Password field.

Configuration of the system shall include setup of:

Remote cameras and alarm names.
Users and Groups.
Data storage allocation.
Macro programming.
Scheduling, display and alarm notification.
Remote pre/post alarm recording.
Backup utility for setup configuration.

The software shall be provided on CD format in a suitable case.

1.8 Digital Video Recording and Network Workstation


Page 17 of 17

The Workstation shall be a state-of-the-art PC computer running Windows XP
Professional. It shall be fully equipped with the Digital Video Recording and Network
Software. The Workstation shall require an external monitor for operation.

The Workstation shall have an ATX platform motherboard and 300 watt power supply
using an Intel 3.5 GHz processor. It shall have 6 GB of RAM memory, a 750 GB hard
drive, a 100 Mbps PCI-type LAN Card, a Video Display Adapter using an nVidia
GeForce FX5200 GPU with 2 GB of RAM memory and additional case fan cooling. The
Workstation shall be equipped with a PS-2 wheel mouse and 101-key keyboard. The
workstation shall be with latest specification existing in the market at the time of
installation.

The Workstation shall be housed in a mid-height tower case with all suitable connectors
available on the back panel. It shall be constructed of steel and plastic materials in a
beige-color exterior. It shall also be operated indoors in a temperature range not to
exceed 32 to 104 F (0 to 40 C) and a humidity range not to exceed 0 to 95% relative, in
a non-condensing atmosphere. The Workstation shall employ a Universal Voltage Power
Supply requiring 105 - 240 VAC @ 50 - 60 Hz.

Recorders shall be provided to store videos for a period of 30 days.

1.9 Control Console

Provide appropriate control console for CCTV ,Access Control System, etc. at the
Control room.

The custom build control desk shall have enough number of 19", 21" & 42" cubicles. Size
and type shall be as per the requirements of providing monitors and control equipment
for all the ELV system as specified and as shown on the related drawings. It shall be to
the approval of CLIENT.

VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 1 of 8

SECTION 17

VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 2 of 8

SECTION 17

VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

3.0 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION

4.0 19 IDT / MDT / FO CD CABINET

5.0 INSTALLATION

6.0 TESTING

7.0 DOCUMENTATION

8.0 WARRANTY

VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 3 of 8

1.0 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1. The proposed solution must be the latest available technology for the structured
cabling system.

2. The contractor shall install complete end-to-end Class E(00) system solution as
detailed in the following sections.

3. The proposed solution of Class E(00) must be provided with a minimum of 15
years performance warranty for the full bandwidth.

4. Wherever the standards (EIA/TIA, Cenelec, ISO) are not ratified, the latest "Draft"
shall be referred.

5. All components pertaining to structured cabling system shall be manufactured
by the DOHMS approved manufacturers, IBM and components from other
manufacturers shall not be accepted.

6. Installation shall meet ETISALAT requirements. Contractor to obtain approval on
drawings from ETISALAT.

2.0 SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

1. The voice panels installed in the IDT / MDT should have RJ45 interface and shall
be installed in industry standard 19" cabinet as indicated in the drawings.

2. Each area shall have its own IDT. The IDT shall constitute of RJ45 Patch Panel
housed in industry standard 19" cabinet ( 800 x 800).

3. The Multi-Pair cables shall be terminated on RJ45 termination panels (also housed
in the 19" cabinet), whereby individual pairs can be accessed.

4. The horizontal cables shall be terminated on Screened RJ45 Patch Panels on the
IDT end and the other end of the cables shall be terminated with single shielded
RJ45 or dual shielded RJ45 outlet based on the drawings.

5. The contractor shall also supply patch cords and line cords to complete the end-
to-end Class E(00) system.

6. The Data MDT (FO Campus Distributor) shall also be installed in industry standard
19" cabinet.

7. Fiber Optic cable constituting of 12 Core MM shall be installed between the IDF
for data backbone application, as indicated in the drawings.

8. The FO cables shall be field terminated with SC connectors in cabinet mounted
FO patch panels.
VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 4 of 8

9. At least one duplex SC-SC patch cords shall be supplied in each IDT, and equal
number in the Data MDT.

10. The main IT room or MDF room shall be called MTR (Main Telecom Room).

11. IDF rooms shall be called FTR (Floor Telecom Room).

3.0 PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS:

Horizontal Cable:

The horizontal cable shall constitute of four (4) individually screened Twisted Pair (SSTP),
AWG23. The outer sheath shall be LSOH and the cable shall be specified up to 250MHz
or better and should have the following values or better for Attenuation and NEXT:

Frequency (MHz) Attenuation (dB) NEXT (dB)
1 2.0 90
4 3.6 88
10 5.7 85
16 7.2 84
20 8.1 83
31.2 10.2 82
62.5 14.7 81
100 18.9 79
155 24.0 78
200 27.0 78
250 31.4 77

The horizontal cabling shall be star-wired.

The maximum horizontal distance shall be 90Mtr. between the outlet and the
patch panel (excluding patch cords and line cords).

The horizontal cabling shall be free of taps and bridges.

One cable shall be strictly used for one application, cable sharing will not be
acceptable.

Connecting Hardware for Horizontal Cable:

Connecting hardware shall be based on shielded RJ45 interface. The hardware shall
feature excellent transmission performance and mechanical strength. Integral wire
management and cable strain relief shall be integrated into the hardware. It should be
possible to use the same RJ45 interface module at the outlet end as well as the patch
panel (IDT) end. Termination of the cables on the hardware shall be accomplished
without the use of any tools i.e. tools free installation. The termination at the patch panel
end should cater to grounding of the panels using separate earthing facilities. The
patch panels should consist of earthing kits to enable this grounding of shielded cabling.
VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 5 of 8

Wherever single RJ45 outlet is used, it should be possible to easily upgrade to dual RJ45,
without any major changes to the faceplate. The Screened RJ45 will have the following
specification:-

- Comply with the latest standard proposals of ISO/IEC and EIA/TIA for Cat 6
requirements.

- Compatible with Category 6 Generic standard plugs.

- Tool-free connection technique (IDC) for data cables with AWG 23-26 wire
diameter.

- Allows opto-mechanical control of the connection technique.

- Error-free connection according to EIA/TIA 568A/B/C without pair crossover.

- Patented shield contacting with integrated cable strain relief.

- Halogen-free material.

- SGS, UL, CSA certified.

Application:

- Draft IEC 60603-7-4: Unshielded 8-Way Connectors for Frequencies up to 250 MHz;
April 2000

- DRAFT ISO/IEC 11801 SECOND EDITIONS: ISO/IEC JTC 1/SC 25/WG3 N598S; 2000-
05-08

- Draft EN 50173 second editions: CLC TC 215 WG1S 2/20; April 2000

Flame retardance :

In accordance with UL 94 V0 Rating

Mechanical, Electrical and Transmission Data (measured at 20C):

Mechanical Data

Material Polycarbonate, (UL 94 V-)
Mating cycles > 750
Wire diameter 0,4 mm (AWG 26) 0,57 mm (AWG 23)
Insulation diameter 0,8 1,6 mm
Wire strain relief Through labyrinth in IDC block
Cable strain relief Through cable ties

For shielded RJ45

Shield contacting Large surface contact springs (on plug)
VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 6 of 8

Shield contacting Shield lance (on cable)
Earthing terminals for flat plugs 4.8 x 0.5 mm
Shield material CuSn, tin-plated, 2 4 m

Electric and Transmission Data

Contact resistance < 50 milli Ohm (conductor conductor)
Contact resistance 1< 20 milli Ohm (shield shield)
Insulation resistance > 500 mega Ohm (500 VDC)
Dielectric strength 1000 Veff, 50 Hz/1 min (conductor conductor)
Dielectric strength 11500 Veff, 50 Hz/1 min (conductor shield)
Coupling resistance IEC 96-1
1 MHz < 15 milliohm

10 MHz < 100 milliohm

RJ45 Hardware Electrical Characterization, Transmission performances:

Worst Pair Combination with a Cat.6 Plug

Patch Cords & Line Cords:

The patch cords and line cords shall constitute of two modular RJ45 plugs assembled on
shielded twisted pair stranded cable. The SSTP stranded cable shall be constructed using
flexible cable . The sum length of all patch cords & line cords for one outlet shall not
exceed 10Mtr. Under no circumstances shall locally assembled patch cords and line
cords will be acceptable, all must be factory made.

Connecting Hardware for Voice Backbone Cable:

The voice backbone cables shall be terminated on high density 50 port RJ45 patch
panels, which shall be housed in the 19" IDT cabinet. These panels shall accept UTP
cables having AWG22-26 solid or stranded wire. Highly visible, colour coded strips shall
be used to identify individual pair of the backbone cable. These panels shall have
features like gas-tight connection, integral strain relief mechanism.

Data Backbone Cable:

Frequency Attenuation NEXT FEXT RL
[MHz] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB] [dB]
Limit Typ Limit Typ Limit Typ Limit Typ
0.02 <0.013 80.0 >96.84 75.0 >83.7 35.0 >45
4 0.04 <0.015 80.0 >85.25 71.05 >73.7 35.0 >45
10 0.06 <0.019 74.0 >77.25 63.1 >66.0 35.0 >43
20 0.09 <0.024 68.0 >71.36 57.1 >60.2 35.0 >38.5
31.25 0.11 <0.018 64.1 >67.82 53.2 >56.4 35.0 >36
62.5 0.16 <0.023 58.1 >61.63 47.2 >50.5 28.1 >30
100 0.20 <0.050 54.0 >58.76 43.1 >46.3 24.0 >27
125 0.22 <0.062 52.1 >58.55 41.2 >44.1 22.1 >25
155.52 0.25 <0.074 50.2 >57.77 39.3 >42.4 20.2 >23
175 0.26 <0.085 49.1 >56.12 38.2 >41.6 19.1 >22
200 0.28 <0.100 48.0 >50.10 37.1 >40.7 18.0 >21.5
250 0.32 <0.170 46.0 >48.39 35.1 >39.2 16.0 >19
VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 7 of 8

The backbone cable for data applications shall comprise of fiber optic cables. The
cables shall have minimum 8 or 12 cores of Multimode 50/125 graded index fiber
strands. The fiber optic cables shall have the following characteristics:

Wavelength (nm) Max. Attenuation (dB) Bandwidth (MHz x
Km)
850 <2.5 >400
1300 <0.7 >1200

If the backbone distance exceeds 550Mtr, single mode fiber cables shall be installed.
These cables when installed, shall have the following characteristics:

Wavelength (nm) Max. Attenuation (dB) Bandwidth (GHz x
Km)
1300 0.4 100
1550 0.2 100

The fiber optic cable shall be tight buffered, indoor type, LSOH when used within the
building and outdoor type, rodent protected when used to connect between the
buildings.

The fiber optic cable shall be installed with a bending radius > 15 times the outer
diameter of the cable.

Connecting Hardware for Data Backbone Cable:

The fiber optic (data backbone) cable shall be field terminated with ST connectors (with
ceramic ferrule) on each fiber strand. These connectors shall be installed in fiber optic
patch panel, mounted in 19" IDT cabinet. These shall feature sliding drawer type panels
for better administration of the fiber cables. The panels shall have holes at the rear for
inserting and strain-relieving cables with PG glands. Cable and fiber guides for buffer
management within the panels shall be built-in the panel. The insertion loss on each SC
connectors shall be < 0.2dB.

Fiber Optic Patch Cords:

Fiber optic patch cords need to be provided to enable rapid connection and
disconnection repeatedly on a non-destructive basis. Fiber optic patch cords shall be
supplied with each IDT. The sum total quantity of IDTs shall be supplied at the data MDT
(SC-SC). The patch cords shall be Multimode Graded Index duplex 50/125 with SC
connectors on one end and the other end will have connectors to suit the network
equipment (SC). Provide for Single mode patch cords, wherever necessary. The patch
cords shall have a mating cycle of 1000 and maximum tensile load on the cable of
100N. Under no circumstances shall locally assembled patch cords and line cords will be
acceptable, all must be factory made.

4.0 19" IDT/MDT/FO-CD CABINET

The cabinet shall provide a controlled environment to house telecommunications
equipment, connecting hardware and to terminate the entire horizontal cabling, voice
VOICE / DATA SYSTEM

Page 8 of 8

backbone cabling and data backbone cabling. These cabinets shall be of high quality
and include locking doors. The cabinet shall be either wall mounted (with access from
back and front Swing type frame) or freestanding (with wheels) depending on the size
of the cabinet. The wall mount cabinet should have a minimum depth of 500mm and
the freestanding cabinet shall have a minimum depth of 800mm. Provide sufficient
space in the cabinet for telecommunications/network equipment and future expansion.
At IDTs where data backbone is not installed, allow sufficient space in the cabinet for
installing data backbone in the future. Wherever data backbone is installed, the IDT
cabinet shall be supplied with Fan Tray and UK type powerstrip. These cabinets shall be
supplied with sufficient quantities of cable organisers for management/dressing of patch
cords.

5.0 INSTALLATION

1. The contractor shall not engage any sub-contractor to carry out the structured
cabling work.

2. The installation shall comply with the requirements of ISO-11801 Class E as
appropriate.

3. The structured cabling system (cables, RJ45 outlets, panels etc) shall be labeled
in accordance with EIA/TIA-606.

6.0 TESTING

1. The contractor shall test and demonstrate on site, to the satisfaction of the
engineer, that the wiring is in full compliance with specific requirements of a
Class E installation (250MHz). All the tests shall be carried out in accordance with
TSB-67 standard.

2. The contractor shall provide test results (both hard copy and soft copy) for every
data and every voice outlet.

7.0 DOCUMENTATION

1. The contractor shall submit a set of documentation comprising of layouts
showing cable route & position of all outlets, labeling scheme, layout of cabinets
and test results.

8.0 WARRANTY

1. The OEM through the specialist contractor shall provide 15 years component and
system performance warranty.

CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM

Page 1 of 8

SECTION 18


Page 2 of 8

SECTION 18


INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

3.0 BATTERIES

4.0 CENTRAL MONITORING DEVICE

5.0 EXIT AND SAFETY LUMINAIRE

6.0 HIGH FREQUENCY ELECTRONIC CONTROLGEAR

7.0 MAIN BATTERY PANEL AND SUBSTATION PANELS

8.0 AUTOMATIC MONITORING AND LOGGING FACILITY

9.0 BMS INTERFACE

10.0 WIRING


Page 3 of 8

1.0 GENERAL

The emergency lighting system & all its components shall be designed & installed to
meet the local civil defense requirements & the respective DIN/VDE 0108 & BS5266
standards applicable to this project.

Emergency lighting shall fulfill the following functions,

Illuminate the escape routes
Indicate the escape route direction clearly
Provide the Exit signs on all the Exits
Ensure fire alarm call points, fire fighting equipment & other life saving equipment on the
premises are properly illuminated.
Permit operations concerned with safety measures & to shut down hazardous processes.

All products used in the emergency lighting system shall be manufactured by an ISO9001
certified company, complying with the relevant VDE/DIN/BS/EN standards & shall bear
the CE certification for Electro-Magnetic compatibility.

The number of central battery panels shall be appropriately decided for maximum
reliability to ensure continued emergency supply & on large buildings failure of one
panel shall not result in total emergency lighting supply failure for the entire building.

2.0 Central Battery System Description

2.1 Mechanical Construction

The battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated housing IP32 with removable
screwed front, rear & top doors to provide complete access to the batteries. The
electronics section shall have IP54 sheet steel enclosure with transparent polycarbonate
window for all central systems & IP54 sheet steel enclosure with full metal door for all
substations.

The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with cable entries
from top via four or more undrilled removable metal flange plates. All incoming cables &
looping circuits shall be connected on protected & fused terminals as per ENVDE0100. All
outgoing luminaire circuits shall be connected direct to relevant components via plug-in
type terminals 2.5 sq. mm. The electronic components shall have 19 slide in technology
for installation and maintenance.

2.2 Electrical Construction

The system shall be built up in a modular format with all modules being plug-in-type
design. The outgoing circuits shall be fed through changeover modules. One module
shall be used for each separate switchable outgoing circuits with maximum load of
6Amps as per DIN/VDE 0108, if circuits are 2 Amps & below, one module with two
separately switchable outgoing circuits shall be used . Each circuit shall be protected
within the system on mains & battery side via screw-in type cartridge fuses on each
module. The fuses shall be accessible via front plate of the module. The mains supply &
battery mains cables shall be protected by knife edge fuses. The fuse holders shall have
handles for simple removal of the fuses.


Page 4 of 8

Each panel shall have a spare fuse carrier with atleast three spare fuses for each size
used in respective panel.

2.3 Control Module

The control module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, composed of a
microprocessor control module with plain text display with multiple line display of
operative states & luminaire failures.

LED,s shall indicate,

- Mains operation
- Mains failure
- Battery operation
- Summation fault

Potential free indicator contacts for,

- Operation
- Battery operation
- Summation fault

Centronic interface for the connection of standard printers shall be provided on the
front of the control module

A electronically controlled 24V output for the voltage monitoring of lighting sub
distribution panels shall be provided.

Electronically isolated mains monitoring for maintained & non maintained light circuits
with forced changeover in case of mains failure from mains to emergency light
operation.

As a standard following programming modes shall be available,

- Manual reset
- Time delay of mains return
- Stair well light timer adjustable from 1 to 15 minutes
- Acoustic alarm in case of mains failure, manual reset or summation fault

Individual changeover per emergency circuit with free programming for maintained or
non maintained light & two pole fusing confronting to VDE.

Failure recognition for each individual safety / Exit luminaire in conjunction with
proprietary electronic ballasts including 2 wire monitoring module without additional
data line.


Page 5 of 8

2.4 Changeover Module

Each changeover module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, freely programmable
to suit type of luminaires connected on outgoing circuits i.e. maintained, non
maintained or switch maintained. The individual lamp monitoring circuits shall be
included in the changeover module. Each changeover module shall have LED
indications for Circuit On & Lamp failure & shall be fit to monitor upto 12 luminaires
maximum as required by DIN/VDE0108/pr EN50171. All outgoing circuit terminals shall be
provided to monitor the sub distribution boards.

2.5 Maintained Light Switch Sensing Module

For mains operation common switching of general lighting & safety lighting by means of
existing light switches a compact fully encapsulated module shall be provided near
each luminaire circuit to be switched with each of these reflecting one lighting switch.
These modules shall also serve as a sub circuit monitoring module, whereby end circuits
are monitored for any power failure in that area.

2.6 Circuit Monitoring Module

Each lighting DB or rack feeding light circuits in all areas shall be provided with voltage
monitoring modules for mains failure so that supply voltage can be automatically
transferred from normal to battery supply mode. In corridors, lift lobbies and entrances,
the respective lighting circuits shall be provided with sub-circuit monitoring modules for
detection of the particular circuit and automatically switching-on the emergency lights
in that area.

2.7 Charger

Charger module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, micro processor controlled
module with temperature controlled voltage charging to IU characteristics. Automatic
boost charging facility shall be built in to the system depending on the required total
battery capacity. It shall have charging & supervising method for failure indication of
battery circuits as well as battery charger. The charger shall be designed for a 90%
recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 20 hours.

It shall come complete with earth leakage monitor for battery circuit monitoring. It shall
be provided with LED indications for,

- Operation
- Charger On
- Booster On
- Mains Operation
- Battery capacity > 10%, >50%, 100%
- Charging Failure
- Insulation fault

It shall have potential free indicator contacts for,

Page 6 of 8

- Charging failure
- Fast charge
- Insulation fault

It shall have a push button to simulate earth leakage failures.

It shall include plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains & battery
accessible via the front plate of the charger

3.0 Batteries

Batteries shall be maintenance free, sealed leak proof 220V lead acid gas
recombination type battery with following system features,

- Life time expectation > 10 years @ 24C ambient temperature as per DIN VDE
0558, Part 508.

- extremely low gas generation, requiring no special ventilation

- acid density between 1.24kg/L & 1.26kg / L

- service life of ten years

- low self discharge

- IP 32 battery cabinet with ventilation openings and IP 54 electronic cabinet.

- maintenance free special connectors with pole covers meeting the rules of
prevention of the accidents

- pole ducts tight to electrolyte & atmospheric oxygen

- absolutely maintenance free over the whole service life

- Immobilized electrolyte design

- permanently sealed pressure release safety vent

- Operates at extremely low internal pressure

4.0 Central Monitoring

The Central monitoring shall be through BMS and the BMS PC.

It shall have programming / automatic testing facility for time duration test, luminaire
display function test, location of luminaire, manual reset & acoustic alarm

5.0 EXIT & Safety luminaire

Unless otherwise stated all EXIT luminaires shall be operated via an EMERGENCY CENTRAL
BATTERY SYSTEM (ECBS).

Page 7 of 8

All Exit luminaires shall have pictogram legends as per DIN 4844/CEN TC 169 or markings
as per local civil defence requirements with viewing distance of 36 meters or 16 meters
based on the length of the corridor. The luminaire shall be built according to EN 60598.

Safety luminaires shall be operated by an EMERGENCY CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM. This
shall be achieved by using high frequency electronic ballasts operating at full load or by
the use of halogen lamp luminaires. These ballast shall be fitted on the part of normal
lighting designated as emergency lighting.

All Exit and safety luminaires shall have a monitoring component with easy accessible
addressing module. All luminaires with high frequency ballasts shall have a built in or
separate monitoring facility. Outside of every installed exit and safety luminaire a label
(Red/White) with the circuit and luminaire reference number shall be installed.

5.1 Slave Emergency Luminaire (Suitable for connection across central battery system)

All luminaries shall meet following requirements :

Supply voltage 220V/230V AC/DC
The luminaire shall comply the requirements of EN60598
Electronic ballast shall comply the requirements of EN60298/60294
EMC or EMI protection to EN55015
Ambient Temperature - 40C.

5.1.1 Type EL 1 (Areas without False Ceiling)

Luminaire shall be non maintained type slave luminaire with 8 watt fluorescent lamp with
addressable low loss electronic ballast which can communicate with central control
module. Luminaire housing shall be white plastic. Luminaire shall be wall / ceiling /
pendant mounted to suit site conditions.

Protection class I, IP 65

5.1.2 Type EL 2 (False Ceiling areas)

1 x 8W fully recessed Emergency luminaire. Housing shall be sheet steel white with
electronic ballast and communication module.
5.2 Slave Exit luminaire (suitable for connection across central battery system)

5.2.1 Type Exit 1 (Areas without False Ceiling)

Maintained 8w luminaire, wall / ceiling / pendant mounted with addressable low loss
electronic ballast which can communicate with the panel.

Protection : IP-65
Minimum viewing distance 30 meters

The diffuser shall have EXIT Legend with running man and directional arrow on one or
both sides as required at the location of installation. Housing shall be white plastic and
diffuser.

5.2.2 Type Exit 2 (Areas with False Ceiling)


Page 8 of 8

Exit light type shall be exclusive edge light with acrylic glass panel. The housing shall be
slim aluminium housing with snap on facility panels. It shall have 8W fluorescent lamp
and addressable electronic ballast

6.0 High Frequency Electronic Control Gear

All safety and exit luminaires shall be built according to EN 60598; electronic ballast to EN
60298/60294 and EN 60924/60925, EMC protection to EN 55015. The electronic ballast
with monitoring facility and easy accessible address module shall have an automatic
cut-out fuse for failures within the lamp circuit.

7.0 Main Central Battery Panel & Sub Station Panels

The substations shall be installed in areas with a maximum room temperature of 30
deg.C. The substations shall be located based on the requirements of the lighting loads
and optimising the field wiring. All substations shall be connected to the central station
for central group monitoring.

8.0 Automatic & Cyclic Function Monitoring & Logging Facility

An automatic monitoring and testing facility shall be installed with permanent cyclic
charger and battery monitor at intervals of five minutes or less with daily/weekly function
test of the complete load supplied from the battery, charger, wiring, luminaires, registration
and logging of tests and results. A manually operated test feature shall also be provided in
addition to the automatically operated testing feature.

9.0 BMS Interface

The CBS shall be integrated on LON works Protocol to BMS. Refer BMS specification for
the details regarding integration. The proposed system shall provide full integration
including luminaire status after each test. Display shall be available on BMS workstation.
Systems which cannot comply with the above will not be acceptable. The Central
Battery system Vendor shall provide LON interface module for data transfer to BMS.

10.0 Wiring

Wiring, both power and control, between the central battery, substation panels and
luminaires shall be carried out in fire retardant Pirelli FP200 or equivalent cable of suitable
size as per the local civil defence requirements.

3 core fire resistant cables with earth wire shall be provided to feed substations from
central battery panel. Cable size selection details shall be submitted based on the
electrical load of each substation.

Emergency lights in each staircase shall be wired in separate circuits to comply with Civil
Defence requirements.

NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 1 of 10

SECTION 19

NURSE CALL SYSTEM
NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 2 of 10

SECTION 19

NURSE CALL SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

2.0 SYSTEM

3.0 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT INTERFACING

4.0 SAFETY

5.0 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 3 of 10

1.0 GENERAL

Computerized Nurse Call Systems shall be manufactured to fulfill the present valid
standards and regulations for light signaling technology (ALT) DIN 41050 (part 1 and 2),
HTM 2015 (BS & EN Standards).

For the installations of light signaling, the regulations DIN VDE 0834 and the standards
that are quoted shall be observed. Furthermore the standards DIN 41050 part 1 and 2 as
well as HTM 2015 shall be taken into consideration during the planning.

The systems shall incorporate the latest technology and shall be manufactured in an ISO
9001 environment.


2.1 Male and Female Wards

The computerized systems shall incorporate logic circuits to enable room data and time
information to be processed. With the nurse call systems it shall be possible to handle up
to 64 zones, which can be each divided into 6 logical sub-zones. This division shall be
achieved by software.

The maximum number of all logical and physical zones shall be limited to 240. For each
physical zone up to maximum of 50 patient rooms shall only be allowed. Furthermore the
system allows flexibility to adapt the allocation of room numbers according to individual
needs.

System characteristics

The nurse call system shall be designed for quick and easy installation. The software shall
allow individual flexibility, adapting to any changes in the application. For example
patient room numbers shall be quickly changed and allocated during or after
installation.

Call and presences shall be displayed at the operating station, in corridors, in duty rooms
and patient rooms. With the speech option, the call shall be answered from any one of
this points.

Operating the presence push button shall result in: cancellation of the call within the
room, activation of the call transfer and preparation of an emergency call. Existing calls
from other rooms shall be transferred to this room.

Systems with a speech facility shall allow communication from room to room or between
duty room and the patient. Speech facility shall be available from every bed. The
computerized nurse call system shall be operated in a centralized, decentralized or
combined mode, according to the requirements.

The system shall use a single six cores cable for power supply, speech and data lines.

System structure

The computerized nurse call system shall consist of 3 components:
NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 4 of 10

The operating computer (PC),
The nurse call control unit (NCS),
The room equipment with individual hand set consisting of Nurse call & speech function
at every bed.

The operating computer and the nurse call control units shall be independently
functional.

Operating Computer

The operating computer shall be used as a display unit for the information of the nurse
call control unit (NCS).

When used with a communication unit and in connection with a speech facility, the
operating computer shall enable general address calls and direct calls to rooms and
beds to take place. Calls on the system and staff presences shall be displayed in tabular
form.

Data specific to each patient shall be entered into an internal data memory. These data
shall be displayed on the screen of the operating computer whenever that patient calls.

Nurse Call Control Unit (NCS)

The nurse call control unit shall be the main control unit. It shall be built as a multi-
processor unit and shall comprise of a microprocessor, and audio adapter card and a
communication processor unit. Additional control cards shall be added according to
requirements.

The control programs and configuration data of the nurse call system shall be loaded via
the operating computer.

Room equipment
Information on the nurse call systems shall be received in rooms using different types of
system units. For example room terminals with displays shall show calls in order of priority.
Remind calls and presences shall be displayed continuously if there are no normal,
emergency or enhanced calls.

The connection board for room terminals and the electronic module shall be used as a
room distribution point and shall allow easy wiring to patient call equipment.

It shall be possible to substitute operating equipment without speech facility. For
example call push buttons or pear and multiple push buttons. In the case of nurse call
systems with speech, facility communication handsets shall be possible to be installed.
These handsets in addition to the call functions shall allow the control of radio and
lighting and provide a means of private two-way conversation. Units shall be capable of
providing integrated telephone functions.

The nurse stations and duty rooms shall be equipped with master stations. These shall
provide a means to set a presence indication as well as allowing zone linking. In addition
the systems shall provide speech facility, general address calls and direct speech to
beds or rooms as appropriate.

NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 5 of 10

In corridors, calls shall be indicated in clear text on information displays or outside the
room by the corridor lamp. Following types of calls shall be indicated:

Type of call As per
DIN 41050, Part 1
Visual signals

- Patient calls
normal call

bathroom/WC call

enhanced
bathroom/WC call

nurse call (abbr.: call)

bathroom or WC call

enhanced call

permanent light - red -

permanent light -
white

flashing light - white -

- Staff calls:
emergency call

doctor call

bathroom/WC
emergency call
nurse call with
emergency call

doctor call

(no statement)
flashing light - red -
permanent light -
green -

flashing light - white -, -
red - green

flashing light - white -
permanent light -
green -

- Further calls:
diagnostic call

remind call
diagnostic call
enhanced call

in memory switching


(slow blinking rhythm)

Also, refer to hospital specialist room data sheet for actual requirement. In addition to
the visual signals, acoustic signals shall also be sent to all rooms where presences are set.
The nurse call system shall distinguish between two call categories. Normal and
bathroom/WC calls shall belong to category 1. Doctor, emergency, diagnostic and
priority calls as well as enhanced bathroom/WC calls and bathroom/WC emergency
calls shall belong to category 2.

In the case of acoustic call transfer, calls of categories 1 and 2, as well as doctor and
telephone calls, shall be identified by different call intervals.

2.2 TRIAGE, RESUSCITATION, ACUTE TREATMENT, SHORT STAY WARDS, ICU, RECOVERY & ALL
TYPE OF OPERATION THEATRES
The nurse call system for these wards shall be able to handle up to 16 physical zones
(Zone controllers / Main control units), which can be each subdivided into 3 logical
groups.

The system shall be able to control up to 127 patient rooms via a corridor data-bus for
each zone controller (main control unit).

Call and presences shall be displayed in the duty room. By activating a presence push
button, the call from the concerned room shall be cancelled, the call transfer shall be
NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 6 of 10

activated and the emergency call shall be prepared. The system shall have the follow
me facility. (Calls from other rooms should be forwarded and audibly indicated to rooms
where presence is set.

The system shall be flexible to adapt the room numbers and the call names according to
the hospital needs and recommendations. In corridors, calls shall be visually indicated by
corridor lamps and information displays that can be wall or ceiling mounted.
Following type of calls shall be indicated:
Call Type Optical signals
Patient calls
Normal call Permanent red light
Bathroom/WC call Permanent white light
Enhanced bathroom/WC
call
Flashing White light
Staff calls
Emergency call Flashing red light and
permanent green light
Bathroom emergency call Flashing white light and
permanent green light
Doctor call Sequential flashing white,
red then green light s
Other call types
Remind call Flashing red light (slow
blinking)
Diagnostic call Flashing red light
Nurse Station:

The nurse station shall have the following functions:

- Call and status identification with following indicators: patient room, bed,
normal call, bathroom/WC call, emergency call, bathroom/WC
emergency call, doctor call, answered call in remind function, presence,
fault, following calls.

- Call activation (call button).

- Cancel and presence button.

- Call reminder.

- Free selection of zone linking from a special module.

- Simultaneous display of several calls and presences.

- Can be upgraded to have speech and public addressing with no major
changing in the system wiring.

Patient handset (multiple push button) functions:

- Nurse call release
NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 7 of 10

- Auto-release unbreakable plug system with 2 m cord length.

- Automatic call release as a plug call when plug ejected from the auto release
plug system

- Easily repaired and changed if required.

- 2 light control buttons.

General Equipment:

The system shall include at least but not only the following main equipment which
can be upgraded at any time without any major changes:

1. Main control unit (Zone controller).

2. Data bus terminator unit.

3. System cabling.

4. Power supply (24 V - DC).

5. Electrical safety components.

Scope of work:

1. The main control unit shall support the following:

All types of patient and staff call including: normal call, bathroom/WC
call, priority call, enhanced bathroom call, emergency call, doctor call
and bathroom emergency call.

Different optical signals for each type of call (different colours and colour
sequences).

Different audio signals for all type of calls (different frequencies).

Can be upgraded to support interface with the following:

- Computer.

- Printer.

- Paging system.

2. The system cabling shall be 4 twisted pairs telephone cable in addition to
one pair 1.5 2 mm
2
for power distribution in the corridor data bus.

3. The power supply of the system shall be 24V self-regulated.

4. Safety features like emergency mode and short circuit protection shall be
built-in the system.
NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 8 of 10

Ward (Nurse station) equipment:

The following equipment shall be available in the Nurse Station:

1. LCD alphanumeric display (Display module unit) for displaying all ward
information.

2. LCD alphanumeric display (Duty Selection Unit) for selection a predefined
link between wards.

3. A reminder button for changing the normal call into a reminded call (with
muted sound) for a certain predefined period of time.

4. A bus connection socket can be added to the station to enable an easy
upgrade to a master station unit with a power saving LCD touch screen
and speech facility.

5. It shall be possible to upgrade the system to have LED dot information
display in the corridor to display all calls information without any
modification in the system (only the cable connection to the display).

6. All active components shall be checked for functionality via the main
control unit automatically every 30 seconds.

Speech components may be added to the system at the nurse station when
required to upgrade with no additional major modifications in the system.
Room equipment:

The following equipment shall be available in the patient rooms

Cancel and presence button:

Equipped with a button, LED reassurance lamp and a buzzer. It shall be used to cancel the
call and set presence of the nurse in the room. It shall be installed at the door entrance.
When the nurse is present in the room, the buzzer shall indicate if there is any calls and their
type from any other room in the ward.

Nurse call module with socket:

It shall be used for Normal call and Emergency call (when nurse is present). It shall be
installed beside the bed or in the bed head unit. The socket shall be used to connect a
multiple push button for the patient. This unit shall be active component unit having its
own logical address.

1. The over door light shall have a plastic base light grey RAL 7040, with white lamp
cover having 3 sections with different colour lamps (white, red and green) to
NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 9 of 10

identify the type of call / presence in the room. Patient hand sets with big red
button having the nurse sign to enable the easy use as well as an unbreakable
self-release plug system. There also shall be a reassurance LED behind the button
to indicate if there is a generated call.

2. All active components shall be checked for functionality via the main control unit
automatically every 30 seconds.
Pull cord (in the bathrooms):
Splash proof with 2 m long red cord having a big red end with the nurse sign to enable
the easy identification.
Individual cancel button:
This shall be used to cancel the bathroom calls independent from the main
cancel/presence button in the room.
Doctors/ Cardiac Call

This is a special button for calling the Doctors. This call shall be used for emergencies.

Over door light (Electronic module for patient rooms):
The electronic module shall be the central control unit for the patient room. At the same
time the electronic module shall be used as a corridor lamp. As active units, a display
module, a speech module and up to eight call modules shall be connected via the bed
data-bus. The active units shall be addressed with an eight-digit alphanumeric text. All
electronic modules shall be equipped with call and cancel circuits for passive circuits.

The over door light shall have a plastic base light grey RAL 7040 surface mounted, with
white lamp cover having 3 sections with different colour lamps (white, red and green) to
identify the type of call / presence in the room. This unit shall be active component unit
having its own logical address.
3.0 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT INTERFACING
The nurse call systems shall be extended by adding equipment via the interface. For
example, it shall be possible to connect the paging system to the nurse call system.
Furthermore it is possible to connect internal messages, such as fire alarms or technical
alarms via interface units.

4.0 SAFETY
The nurse call system shall be self-monitoring. Any malfunctions shall be selectively shown
on each display terminal. In the case of a total failure of the nurse call control unit (PRZ)
the system shall operate in an emergency mode and provide call functions, call cancel,
presence indication and call transfer to rooms where presence has been set, in addition
to the visual indication of the corridor and zone lamps. In case of power failure, calls shall
remain stored until the power supply is connected again.

An auto-release plug mounted onto a pear or multiple push buttons as well as on the
patient terminal or patient handset shall allow a safe disconnection and thus avoid
damage to the plug and socket units found in conventional arrangements. When a plug
is inadvertently removed a "plug out" message shall be shown on the display units. Lamp
outputs shall also be short circuit protected.
Electrical safety and EMC requirements shall conform to appropriate EC directives.

NURSE CALL SYSTEM

Page 10 of 10

5.0 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

The equipment shall be durable. Room equipment such as the room terminal and the
electronic modules shall be possible to be replaced at any time, simply by plugging and
unplugging, without interrupting the operation of the system.

A diagnostic function shall allow the display of information regarding the actual
operational condition of the system on screen of the operating computer.

It shall be possible to connect a modem to the operating computer enabling remote
diagnostics and the update of new systems software. This shall allow capability to
diagnostic problems and enable software improvements.
CENTRAL CLOCK SYSTEM

Page 1 of 4

SECTION 20


Page 2 of 4

SECTION 20


INDEX

1.0 GENERAL


Page 3 of 4

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall allow for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a
Central clock system comprising of Time Control Center, TCXO modules chime modules,
secondary clocks, power supply units and all necessary cabling and termination. The
system shall be generally as indicated on the drawings and as herein specified, to the
approval of the Engineer.

The equipment shall be UL standard 863 and must be CSA certified.

The contractor shall submit the material submittal strictly based on each and every
clauses of the specification for strict quality assurance and performance of the system.
Alternative proposal will not be accepted in whatsoever the reason, unless the
alternative manufacturer comply the specification requirements of the system.
Compliance statement shall be submitted with supporting design calculation and
product literature and schematic diagrams for engineers approval.

The equipment shall meet the following requirements.

1.1 Time Control Center

The time control center shall provide accurate time keeping for control of secondary
clocks such as Celestra, BCD data clocks, synchronous wire, power line carrier, and a
minute impulse clocks .

The Time control center shall have a programmable time and day of week referenced
control of six output circuits.

A liquid crystal display shows the time, day of week, and the status of the six output
circuits. The display is also used for programming, editing and reviewing of stored
programs.

The state of the six output circuits is programmed by the user through a keypad or may
also be controlled by six manual override switches. The user may program from one
to four independent schedules within the Time Control Center. Changing between
schedules is accomplished from the keyboard and may be done at any time.

The display in its run mode shall indicate the time, day of week, circuit status, and what
schedules have been selected. When the programming mode has been entered the
display shall lead programming sequence by flashing what is to be selected. Responses
to prompts are entered via the keyboard using either the Yes or No keys.

The control switches shall have 3 position (on/auto/off) maintained switches. Manual
on/off control shall override the programmed functions. The Auto position provides
programmed functions to occur.

Complete manual control of secondary clocks shall be provided via Man/Auto/Off
switches for synchronous wired and power line carrier systems with generator start.

The Time Control center shall meet/have the following operational and functional
requirements.


Page 4 of 4

a. Microprocessor based controller
b. Controls synchronous Wired
c. RS-232 interface for synchronization to WWV
d. 6 local program control circuits
e. 7day programming (seconds resolution)
f. Automatic daylight saving time correction
g. Manual override switches
h. Interactive Programming
i. Liquid crystal display (6 digits)
j. All programmed times available to all circuits and schedules
k. 4 program schedules
l. 1000 program events
m. AC line synchronous or DC Quartz time base
n. 19 rack mountable
o. Impulse clock control
p. Coded Receiver Interface
q. Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator - (TCXO)
r. Must comply with UL standard 863

1.2 Programming Keypad

The 12 segment shall be used to input all programming including setting of the time and
date, daylight saving time changes, schedules changes, and selection of 12 or 24 hour
display format. It shall be possible to secure the keyboard by an access code which shall
prevent tampering or unauthorized program modifications.

Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator

The Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator (TCXO) shall be used to stabilize the
power line frequency. The temperature compensated crystal module shall provide a
source of frequency reference to the central controller. This module shall provide
accuracy of + 3 seconds per month from 32 degree F to 122 degree F.

1.3 Receptacle Assembly
The receptacle assembly shall be used to connect surface mounted clocks equipped
with four position connectors. It shall be mounted on a stainless steel single gang plate
that measures 2-3/4 wide by 4-1/4 high.
1.4 Analog Clock Assemblies

Standard Features:
400mm dia analog clock
Anodized aluminum housing
Black numbers on white background
Single or double sizes, wall or ceiling mounting bracket
24V polarized 1/1 with pulses from master clock
Protection IP44
DESCRIPTION
The analog clocks provided shall have high visibility under a variety of ambient light
conditions. The clock shall be round shape of 400mm diameter. Clocks shall also be
connected to power line carrier/synchronous timing inputs that provide hourly and 12
hour corrections. A capacitor in each clock maintains timekeeping for approximately 12
hours in the event of power failure in the facility.

PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND
MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 1 of 9

SECTION 21

PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM
MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 2 of 9

SECTION 21

PUBLIC ADDRESS / BACKGROUND MUSIC SYSTEM

INDEX

1.0 GENERAL

MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 3 of 9

1.0 GENERAL

The Contractor shall allow for the supply, installation, testing and commissioning of a
Public Address system comprising of Amplifiers, Audio matrix units, loudspeakers, FM/AM
tuner, Twin Cassette deck, CD player, Digital Voice Announcer, Multi-zone paging
microphone and all necessary cabling and termination. The system shall be generally as
indicated on the drawings and as herein specified, to the approval of the Engineer.

The complete system shall be supplied by a specialist Subcontractor having at least 5
years experience in the field. All equipment supplied shall be from reputed
manufacturers and shall be installed by the authorized representative of the
manufacturer.

In general, the main system shall allow making vocal announcements from different
microphones as shown in the layout drawing, playing recorded message
announcements and playing background music via a twin tape deck, a multi disc CD
player and one AM/FM tuner. Selection of music for the public areas shall be from the
amplifier rack itself.

The system control console shall be located in the Security Office. It shall be possible to
make announcement from any paging microphone to the corresponding areas or to
any other zones required at the site. Audio matrix shall be used with appropriate wall
mounted selector push buttons provided near to each microphones.

It shall be possible to select any or all zones for paging from the microphones. The
recorded message module shall be initiated manually by push buttons or automatically
by potential free contacts from the Fire Alarm control panel.

System shall be configured in such a way that when a paging to the area where local
audio/visual system is introduced, paging from main system shall override local
programme being conducted.

For paging purposes the entire area shall be divided into 16 zones. Volt-free contacts
corresponding to alarm conditions of each zone and roof shall be made available at
the amplifier rack by the Fire Alarm system supplier.

The digital storage module shall be capable of storing three different messages, Alert,
Evacuate and All Clear each of at least 18 seconds duration. It shall be possible to
manually override an automatic announcement.

Output of Audio matrix to the corresponding zone shall be through dedicated amplifiers
for each zone. Common amplifiers for different zones will not be acceptable. Modular
amplifiers as specified with all plugg-in input modules shall be provided for Central
reception and integrated amplifier for other zones.

The system shall be provided with 22 zones minimum to programme each zone as per
the requirement of the user.

1.1 Amplifier Rack

MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 4 of 9

The amplifiers and associated equipment shall be housed in a standard 19 rack with
glass door. Ventilation panels shall be provided for proper air circulation and cooling.

1.2 Modular Amplifier Mainframe

The amplifier shall be modular construction with preamplifiers pluggable onto a
mainframe. Upto six preamplifiers could be added as required providing microphone
input module, lineinput module, alarm tones, digital voice module, Chime module etc.

Amplifiers with built in music sources input and mic input will not be accepted.

Control over the total mainframe shall be achieved through audio monitoring
combiners. The motherboard shall also be capable of accepting switch selectable pre-
announcement chimes.

The power rating of the amplifiers shall be 75W, 150 watts or 300 watts depending on the
loudspeaker load requirements. No amplifier shall be loaded more than 80% of its rated
capacity. Slave amplifiers shall be used to meet additional power requirements.

The amplifiers shall have the following technical characteristics.

Output power Nominal RMS : 120 W or 250W
Maximum RMS(100V) : 135W or 300W
Output Voltage : 100V
Output Regulation : 1.25dB/1.5 dB
100Vline, 3 dB down
Frequency Response : 60 Hz-20,000Hz
Total harmonic distortion : <0.4%
Output noise : >85dB
Sensitivity : 0dBm, 775mVolts
AC Input : 220V,50Hz
Operational temperature : -20 to 45 deg C

1.3 Microphone input Module

The module shall be a basic general purpose low impedance balanced microphone
input, with a selectable phantom power facility. In addition it can be configured to
process ambient noise sensor signals when used in conjunction with level regulating
combiner.

It shall have the following specifications:

Sensitivity : 200uV maximum.
Input impedance : 350 Ohms @ 1kHz. Suitable for upto
200 Ohms microphone impedance.

Frequency response : 30Hz and 18kHz 150 Ohms source
Signal/noise ratio : 55dB max. sensitivity, 150 Ohms source
Distortion : 0.1% at nominal output 1kHz, max. sensitivity

1.4 Balanced line input module

MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 5 of 9

The balanced line input module shall be a general purpose balanced 600 Ohminput,
with a selectable phantom power facility for use with microphones having built-in pre-
amplification. It can also be configured for inputs from 100V line source by switch
selection.

It shall have the following specifications:

Sensitivity : 150mV maximum, 100V minimum by internal
switch selection
Input impedance : 15k Ohms (300mV),100k Ohms (100V).
Frequency response : 30Hz to 20kHz
Signal/noise ratio : 65dB max. sensitivity, input terminated
Distortion : 0.1% at nominal output 1kHz, max. sensitivity

1.5 FM/AM Tuner

The tuner shall be a modular Quartz-PLL synthesizer tuner with random presets for 30
FM/AM stations. It shall have a 4 letter station name memory and all 30 preset stations
are automatically sampled in sequence for the user to decide a station to listen to.

The tuner shall be connected to the system using balanced line input specified
elsewhere in the specification. The tune shall be Pioneer or equal.

Tuning Range : AM - 530-1700kHz
VHF/FM - 87.5-108 Mhz
Sensitivity : 31.2dBf (1.3uV, 75Ohms)
Frequency response : 30Hz 15,000Hz +/- 1 dB
Signal to Noise Ratio : (IHF) Mono/Stereo
76dB/73dB (at 85dBf)
T.H. Distortion : 0.3%
Stereo Separation : 40 dB @ 1kHz.
Power Consumption : 10W

1.6 Digital Voice Announcer Module

The Audio Message Storage module shall be pluggable onto the mainframe and shall
provide on site recording from microphone or tape for verbal warning, informative
messages or a combination of the two allowing system operators to record and re-
record their own messages independently.

Once recorded, the messages may be played back any number of times without
degradation of the audio quality.

The Solid State Audio Message Storage module shall be fitted in the amplifier mainframe
front panel. The design uses digital audio conversion and storage of high quality audio
announcements, each of up to 36 seconds in length.

It shall be designed with internal battery backup facilities to ensure that the message
data is retained when the power to the amplifier mainframe is removed. It shall also
provide internally selectable message override functions. These enable alarm messages
to be triggered remotely by external control line like from fire detection system.

MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 6 of 9

The maximum number of messages can be stored in each module shall be 2. 2 Nos. such
modules shall be included in the system for 3 messages. It shall have the following front
panel controls: Rec/Play, Record/Preview, Step sequence (1-8) and shall have an audio
bandwidth of 100Hz to 5.5kHz.

On playback, external control lines(dry contacts from Fire Alarm Panel) enable messages
to be triggered individually or in sequence by external equipment.

1.7 Integrated Amplifier

The amplifier shall be rated 60W or 120 W suitable to drive the loudspeakers and shall
have a 20% spare capacity. It shall be a full feature integrated amplifier with four
universal inputs, front panel activity indicators and shall be rack mountable. It shall be
possible to add slave amplifiers for additional power requirements.

The amplifier shall have the following characteristics.

Input : 220/240V, 50Hz
Output regulation : <2dB
Distortion : <0.1%
Frequency response : 60Hz-18kHz
Power rating : 60W or 120W

The amplifiers shall support following basic requirement:

Universal prioritized inputs
Two note chime facility
Music/Speech and speech only 100V/8Ohm output
Phantom Power
Alarm tone generator
VOX and dual supply operation

1.8 Audio Matrix Mixer

The matrix mixer shall be used to connect all the microphone and music sources inputs
and to route the required input to a particular output. It shall provide 16 line level inputs
and up to 16 line level outputs. All input and output connectors shall be Phoenix type
connectors. Each 110 cross-point shall provide full user control of parameters including
level, ramp time, and slew rate. Ramping and ducking of cross-point levels shall be
under user control. All inputs shall be independently routable to any or all outputs. The
gain adjustment of level at each cross-point shall be from 0dB to -100dB. The matrix shall
be programmable through an RS232 port.

The matrix shall be capable of routing paging inputs while automatically ducking
background sources. The matrix shall be controllable through an external ReO device
bus. The ReO bus shall be a synchronous 485 protocol capable of supporting up to 128
remotes in a system. Remotes shall be group-able into logical stations. ReO remote
devices shall be both push-button and rotary knob devices capable of selecting audio
sources and controlling audio volume levels. Outputs shall be groupable into logical
zones. The matrix shall be operable either as a stand-alone device or in conjunction with
computer control through an RS232 interface. The matrix shall be provided with a
standard Windows graphical user interface for setup and control.

MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 7 of 9

There shall be available an sixteen channel optional mic/line card to provide pre-
amplification of input signals. This card shall provide four ranges of gain from 0dB to
+60dB. The gain range shall be automatically or manually selectable. The mic/line cards
input impedance shall be equivalent to the standard line level inputs of the mixer. The
matrix shall be capable of external DC controllers via digital I/O ports. The matrix shall be
capable of saving and restoring all settings in the event of a power failure.

The matrix shall be capable of accepting both AC and DC power supplies. The
frequency response of the matrix mixer shall be .5dB from 20Hz to 20kHz and +0, -3 from
10Hz to 30kHz. Crosstalk shall be better than -80dB. Crosspoint attenuation resolution shall
be .4dB per step. Input impedance shall be 20Kw balanced and 10Kw unbalanced with
a maximum level of +24dBV RMS. Output impedance shall be 220w unbalanced and
440w balanced, with a maximum level of +24dBV RMS.

Remotes Control modules for Matrix

The unit shall be wall-mounted for remotes function as convenient user interfaces for
paging, program source selection and volume control.

It shall be used for remote controls to conveniently interconnect in LAN bus topology. It
shall be possible to connect up to 128 remotes with one matrix mixer via ReO bus
communication.

The module shall be a digital remote control device designed for source selection or
page routing functions. Each remote has four momentary buttons and four
corresponding red status LEDs to indicate when a selection has been activated.

It shall be programmed to function as a paging station. In this mode, each of the
four buttons selects the room or zone to which a page will be routed. Multiple remotes
shall be be used if more than four destinations are required. LEDs indicate when a page
is successful, or blink to indicate a zone is already being paged into from another
location.

1.9 Tape Deck

The tape deck shall be multiple cassette players designed to provide continuos music
from up to two cassette decks. Each player shall accommodate up to two front loading
cassette decks.

The unit shall be of Digital processing system with 20 bit A/D and D/A converters, 2 auto
reverse cassette transports with rely play, Digital Noise Reduction, Normal/high speed
tape dubbing, Dolby HX Pro, Dolby B/C Noise reduction with built-in MPX filter.

The mainframe shall play both sides of each cassette before stepping on to the next. If
this deck is empty, or has been removed for service, the mainframe shall automatically
searches for the next available cassette module. The deck in use is indicated on the
mainframe front panel.

Each cassette deck module is equipped with LEDs indicating tape loaded and tape
direction. Cassettes may be manually ejected by a push-button on each front panel.
The tape deck shall be from Pioneer or equal.

WOW and Flutter : 0.09%
MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 8 of 9

Frequency response : 20Hz 18,000Hz
Signal to Noise Ratio
Digital Noise Reduction : 90dB (with Dolby B/C NR)
Harmonic Distortion : 0.8% (-4dB)
4 digit electronic counter : 2
Power Consumption : 25W

1.10 CD Player

The CD player shall be multi-disc one to load a minimum of 6 discs into a magazine for
unrepeated play of 6 discs. It shall have 1 bit Direct Linear Conversion and D/A
converter, Full function remote control with 6 disc keys and power on/off, Magazine Hi-
Lite scan. The unit shall be from Pioneer or equal.

All discs could be played sequentially or randomly. The frequency response shall be 20-
20,000Hz, signal to noise ratio 98dB and total harmonic distortion shall be <.005%.

The dynamic range shall be 95 dB and power consumption of 12W. The unit shall be
supplied with a remote control.

The computer used for loading Matrix operating software shall be an IBM PC 2.0GHz,
128MB RAM, 40GB hard disk, 1.44MB floppy disk, 2 serial port, I parallel port, DVD ROM
mouse, keyboard etc. with Windows 98/2000 operating system.

1.11 Desk Top paging Microphone

Paging microphones shall be desk top type with provision for selecting up-to fifteen
zones. The microphone shall have cardioid response and shall be contoured for high
speed intelligibility. It shall have momentary push to talk buttons and busy indicator.
Impedance shall be 300 ohms floating.

1.12 Volume Control

Volume control shall be provided as shown on the drawings. It shall be stepped,
continuously rotating group volume controls with 6dB voltage steps and for control of
loads of appropriate speaker zones.

1.13 Music Override Unit

Music override units are to be provided as shown on the drawings for overriding any
local music being played on an emergency paging from the main amplifier rack. The
unit shall be suitable for installation on a single gang backbox and shall be of the same
finish as other electrical accessories.

1.14 Loudspeakers

Loudspeakers shall be installed in the areas to achieve a uniform sound pressure level.
The loudspeakers shall be mounted on walls, ceiling or in ground to meet the site
requirements.

All loudspeakers shall have 100V line transformer to match 100V amplifier outputs.

MUSIC SYSTEM

Page 9 of 9

The loudspeakers, including horns if used, shall provide music quality reproduction with a
frequency response upto at least 14,000Hz.

The specified power ratings of the speakers are the maximum values and no speaker is
expected to be tapped at the maximum rating. The speakers shall be Penton or equal.

1.15 Sound Projectors

The sound projectors shall be used for external areas where false ceiling not available. It
shall have a frequency response of 150 Hz-16 kHz and a maximum power rating of 15
watts.

The transformer shall have tappings of 15, 7.5, 4.0 and 0.8 watts at 100 volts. The SPL shall
be 95dB, 1watt,1m. and the dispersion angle shall be at least 150 deg.

The speakers shall be of weatherproof construction in aluminium alloy extruded body
and front grill shall be perforated aluminium, with fixing brackets for angled positioning.

Ceiling mounted Loudspeaker

The ceiling loudspeaker shall include a high compliance loudspeaker, 100 volt
transformer and steel construction.

The loudspeaker shall have a dispersion angle of 140 deg, a frequency response of 120
Hz-20kHz and a maximum power rating of 6 watts.

The transformer shall have power tapping of 6,.3,1.5, and 0.75 watts at 100 volts. The
directivity Q factor shall be 2.9 @ 1kHz.

Sound Pressure Level shall be 93dB @ 1m, 1watt and 104dB @ full power, 1m

The unit shall have a diameter of 189mm and be finished in white (RAL 9010) enamel.
Construction shall be of welded steel to prevent vibration and rattle.

The baffle shall utilise a torsion spring fixing for installation with either mounting ring or
protective enclosure (fire-dome) to suit the site requirement.

ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 1 of 11

SECTION 22

ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 2 of 11

SECTION 22

ACCESS CONTROL AND DOOR MONITORING SYSTEM

INDEX

1. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

2. SOFTWARE

3. PC REQUIREMENTS

4. INTELLIGENT CONTROL PANEL

5. CARD & READERS

6. BADGE/CARD PRINTER

7. MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACT

8. ELECTRIC LOCK, POWER TRANSFER & REMOTE RELEASE / REQUEST TO EXIT
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 3 of 11


1. The contractor shall appoint a specialist subcontractor for the supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of an Online Access Control System as per the
requirement of the user. The specialist subcontractor shall carry out a
comprehensive training program for the security and maintenance personal of
the facility. The structure and contents of the training program shall be as
detailed in Section 1. The proposed products shall be supported by a local
distributor/installer with sufficient experience in the industry. Only the equipment
approved by the engineer, shall be delivered to site or installed. The system shall
include control panels, smart cards and card readers, magnetic door contacts
and magnetic locks as indicated on the drawings. The system shall include any
additional accessories or parts those are not indicated on this specifications and
drawings required to form a fully operational system to the satisfaction of the
engineers.

The system shall include proximity cards and proximity readers as indicated on
the drawings.

2. Different control panel configurations for one, two, four, six and eight doors shall
be available to allow various combinations of card/card reader or keypad
inputs, relay outputs, and alarm inputs to maximize system hardware flexibility.
Panels can be combined to provide the exact number of inputs and outputs
required for each application. All panels shall support a fully distributed
architecture with all real-time processing done at each panel.

3. The Access Control System shall provide the following minimum features:

a) Instant response to Card Read within 0.25 seconds and reporting on
access control monitoring within 2.0 seconds.

b) No degradation of system performance in case of a communication loss.
All time zones access levels, and holiday schedule shall remain
operational on such occasion.

c) No loss of transaction for system history flues. All panels automatically shall
switch to buffer mode, capable of storing 10,000+ events per panel.

d) Each panel shall represent one "Intelligent Controller" in the distributed
processing network. Each Controller shall use an Intel 80C88
microprocessor as its engine.

e) Information shall be downloadable to the panels using either a PC or LAN
network. A Computer shall not be necessary for panel operation and
may be taken off-line if required, once the system information has been
downloaded to the panels.

For basic system requirements a PC shall simply be used as a Terminal or
Window into the System, History Data Logging Device and Data
Manager.

4. All panels shall have a built-in reset timer (watchdog circuit) that automatically
reboots the panel in the event that the processor is interrupted by a transient
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 4 of 11

surge. When a system processor is reset, it shall automatically request a
parameter down load from the Master panel and reboot to its proper working
state. If the Master panel is reset, it shall automatically request a parameter
download from the PC or LAN. When the Master is a modem location, it shall
automatically dial the PC or LAN, via modem, and receive the parameter
downloaded.

5. The doors shall operate Fail safe/Fail Secure as per Engineers requirements on
site. Refer door hardware schedule in Architectural Specification for a
comprehensive list of doors to be provided with security / access control devices.
The complete scope of work shall include all locations listed in the schedule and
/ or shown on drawings.

6. The Contractor shall coordinate the location with the door schedule prepared by
the Main Consultant.

7. The specialist Contractor shall take into consideration of latest Dubai Police
requirements and include the same in as part of contract.

2.0 SOFTWARE

1. The access control systems PC or LAN application software shall be a true 32-bit
access control software that utilizing a Windows 2000 or NT operating system and
combining point monitoring, control with integral Photo I.D. Badging, Guard Tour,
Time and Attendance, Alarm Graphics and system integration (interfacing) for
CCTV, BMS, Fire, etc. The application software shall be capable of running on
either a single PC or on a multi-user Local Area Network.

2. TCP/IP network communications shall be utilized to provide user interaction and
real-time monitoring to workstations or PC's located anywhere on a LAN or WAN.
The software shall be password word protected to allow for operator specific
capabilities at each workstation. The access control system application software
shall incorporate Point and Click operation with hierarchical tree views and pop
up menus for ease of use. I/O monitoring and control shall be achieved through
animated icons that depict the real-time status of each input or output. The
software shall also allow I/O points to be assigned to an Override Group, allowing
for multiple inputs and outputs to be monitored and controlled via a single icon.

3. The access control system application software shall have the ability to support
and configure Graphic alarm maps and will provide detailed information
regarding any I/O point within the system. The graphic maps will display real-time
status of each I/O point and will allow the system operator to perform manual
overrides directly from the map.

4. Photo I.D. Badging shall be integral feature of the access control application
software. The system shall have the ability to import card holder images from a
file, capture images from a live video source, or work with any device providing
a TWAIN interface. The application software shall have the ability to print and
store multiple images. Automatic Image Recall and Verification upon card use
shall be an integral feature of the access control Windows 2000/NT application
software. The software must support signature pads, finger print scanners, bar
code and magnetic stripe encoding. A suitable Card printer using latest
technologies shall be supplied with the system, including camera, tripod, video
capture card etc.
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 5 of 11

5. The access control application software shall have the ability to create badge
templates by using drag and drop tools and shall incorporate features such as,
transparent backgrounds, image ghosting, text centering, text shrink to fit, bring
to front, send to back, layering and rotation to any degree. The software shall
also have the ability to create unlimited badge templates, allowing multiple
departments and user groups to have unique badges. The software shall support
single or two-sided color or black and white badges and will permit either one
time or batch process printing.

6. The access control application software shall have flexible linking capabilities
that allow for any card, input or output in any location throughout the distributed
network to link (interlock) with any other input or output within that location. The
creation of mantraps shall be a matter of software programming and will require
no additional hardware.

7. The access control application software shall provide the ability to create simple
or extensive Custom History Reports. The report function shall allow the operator
to define reports by cardholder, input, output, events or any combination of
these items.

8. The access control application software shall be fully year 2000 compliant.
3.0 PC REQUIREMENTS

1. CPU Minimum : Pentium IV 3.2GHz (or better) - Host PC for single PC,
single location system, or LAN workstation for single
location system.

2. Operating System : Windows 2000 or NT Workstation Version 4.0 (or higher)
Service Pack 3 or greater if required. Service Pack 3 shall
be included with the Access Control System application
software CD. Windows NT Server is required for system with
5 or more workstations.

3. Memory : 256 MB of memory for File Server or Comm. Server shall be
available.

4. Drives : Application software shall be provided on CD only. History
archives and database backups performed in the
software will utilize the floppy drive or other specified
target drive.

5. Drives : One Floppy Drive 3.5", 1.44M
One CD-RW Drive 16x speeds (or better)

6. Hard Disk : 80 Gigabyte Hard Disk (or better).

7. Monitors : 19-inch Color monitor, LCD.

8. Local Area Network : Windows 2000/NT Workstation Version 4.0 or higher with
Service Pack 3 (or greater). Windows NT Server is required
for 5 or more Workstations. 10 Mbit (or better) LAN card is
required. LAN adapter Card 100Mbit (or better) adapter
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 6 of 11

card. 10/100 base T. TCP / IP - protocol must be loaded
even if there is no LAN.

9. Serial Ports : Two Serial Ports

4.0 INTELLIGENT CONTROL PANEL

The Intelligent Controller Panel (ICP) unit shall have the following specifications:

1. 9600 Baud - Dial-up / 38400 Direct

2. 150 + Card, Reader and Keypad Formats

3. Flexible I/O Linking

4. Removable Terminal Blocks

5. Supports 4 State Input Monitoring

6. UL 294 Listed and CE approved

7. Each ICP unit shall be comprised of a processor and an I/O-termination board.
This combination will form an Intelligent Controller Panel (ICP). The ICP shall
contain an 80C88 processor and RAM chips. The I/O portion shall contain the
power supply and field wiring terminals.

8. The ICP shall be capable of operating as a fully distributed processing control
panel that retains all data necessary for system operation in its own RAM. The ICP
shall have the ability to check its database and make decisions about output
control, alarm monitoring and time zone changes. The ICP shall have an integral
real-time clock that allows all time zone events to continue even when PC
communications are not available.

9. The ICP unit shall have the ability to be programmed as either a Master or Slave
in a distributed network. A dipswitch selection feature within the ICP shall
determine the Master or Slave mode of operation. The first ICP of each location
shall be designated as the Master. The Master panel will have the ability to
communicate with PC, LAN and Slave panels simultaneously.

10. Communications between ICP Master panels and a host PC or LAN shall be via
RS-232. The ICP manufacturer shall provide fully integrated Windows NT/2000
network compatible system operating software, for the purpose of controlling the
ICP network through a Local Area Network (LAN).

11. The ICP unit shall have 16 E.O.L. supervised inputs for point monitoring. The input
shall have a status LED to indicate electrical status regardless of the armed state.
The inputs on the ICP shall support two; three and four state monitoring, with five
input configurations to choose from. Inputs configured for three and four state
circuits shall support trouble reports.

12. The ICP unit shall be compatible with Wiegand, Barium Ferrite, Proximity, Bar
Code, Magnetic Stripe, Biometrics and Smart Card readers and shall allow any
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 7 of 11

combination of reader technologies to be used in the same system. The ICP unit
shall allow keypads to be added with readers in order to create a card and PIN
controlled entry point.

13. There shall be a highly flexible and extensive Programmable-linking feature that
allows an input to link to other inputs or to outputs. The Programmable Linking
feature shall also allow outputs to link to other outputs or to input. The ICP unit
shall also provide the ability of assigning access codes to link to either inputs or
outputs or both. The Linking feature shall allow the ICP to be used for a multitude
of applications including Floor Select Elevator Control, HVAC Control and Alarm
Annunciation and Control.

14. The ICP unit shall have a standard configuration of 64K of ROM and 64K of RAM.
The RAM memory allocation shall be dynamic and set for optimum use by the
Host PC, or LAN operator according to the data entered for each location. The
RAM memory shall be expandable from 64K up to 192K by adding up to four 32K
RAM chips.

15. The Pre-Warn Output of the ICP unit shall be used to indicate the controlled door
is being held open and about to go into alarm.

19. Temperature Operating 32 to 131 F
Storage -35 to 150 F

20. Humidity Operating 0 to 95%, relative

21. Supply Voltage Panel Voltage 16.5 VAC 40VA
AUX DC Voltage 12-24 VAC 40VA
Power Requirements 33 Watts (.031 BTU)
Panel Current Draw 550 ma

22. Output Voltage Panel outputs shall provide a regulated voltage. The AUX
DC output provides an unregulated voltage from the AUX
AC supply voltage.

Panel Output 1 12VDC 1A Fused
Panel Output 2 9 VDC 300ma current limited
Panel Output 3 5 VDC 300ma Fused
Panel Output 4 12-24 VDC 3A Fused

23. Inputs EOL Supervised 16

Inputs 7 and 8 shall be used for the door position switch and exit request unless
otherwise programmed. All Inputs support two, three and four state monitoring
and five programmable circuit types.

24. Outputs Form C Relays 8
Relay Output Ratings 5 Amp 24 VDC / 5Amp 115VAC
LED Outputs 6 - 3 per reader
Pre-Warn Outputs 2 - 1 per door

25. Controlled Entry Points Two Card Reader or Keypad

26. Charging Output Trickle Charge 13.5 VDC 500ma Fused
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 8 of 11

27. Standby time ICP unit under Maximum Load shall be 3.25 hours.
The ICP shall tests the integrity of the Battery once every 24 hours.

28. Comm. Ports RS-232 Port 1 Master Comm., Modem or direct
RS-485 In 2 One for Master, One for Slave
RS-485 Out 1 For Subsequent Slaves

29. I/O Extender 1 No. for expansion of Inputs or Outputs

30. Processor Intel 80C88 or V20 8Mhz

31. RAM Memory Standard 64K
Expandable to 192K

32. The transaction buffer shall automatically adjust to use any RAM not allocated for
system parameters. Upon completion of a download from PC or LAN to a Master
ICP, the Event Buffer size is reported to the PC or LAN and displayed on the
Monitor Screen(s).

33. ICP Packaging The ICP unit shall be supplied complete with Processor Board, I/O
board, Ribbon Cable, 16 EOL Resistors, Enclosure, Lock and
Key, Wiring Label, Anchors and Wire Ties, Tamper Switch,
and an External AC Power Indicator.
5.0 CARD & READERS

1. ACCESS CARD

a. Contact less, multiple applications ISO credit card size card with high-speed
read/write (106 kbits/s) and data exchange with the reader as specified in ISO
7816 shall be used in the system.

b. The cards shall be plain white, wiegand encoded, gloss finish on both sides and
shall be directly printable on both sides.

c. The read distance of the cards using relevant proximity reader shall be upto 10
cms, with fast transaction time of less than 100 ms.

d. Cards shall be constructed of laminated PVC, with data retention on
temperature range of 25 Deg. C to +70 Deg. C.

e. 300 nos. cards to be supplied with Video badging.

2. PROXIMITY CARD READER

1. The system shall be equipped with proximity card readers with keypad and a
tamper switch as shown on the drawings. It shall be possible to use different types
of cards/readers in the system.

2. The Proximity Reader shall be a Uni-Directional Indoor or Outdoor unit designed
for mounting on any surface including solid metal. The reader can be mounted
behind most building materials such as sheet rock, or it can be mounted with its
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 9 of 11

side against a metal door or window frame. This unit shall have a read range of
more than six cms.

3. The Proximity Reader shall be a unitized reader with a standard Wiegand output
that connects directly to the access control panel without the use of an interface
module. The reader shall be designed to work with any HID proximity cards.

4. The card reader shall read the encoded data from the access card and/or
transponder and transmit the data back to the host panel, giving an audible and
visual indication of a properly read card and shall have a hold line that will buffer
a card read until the panel has asserted that the information can be sent up line.

5. The card reader shall have a re-present mode in which the card must be taken
from the reader field for one second before being read again. This feature is
required to prevent multiple reads from a single card presentation
The reader shall be powered from the access control panel (ICP) directly.

Warranty Lifetime warranty

Color Black

Construction Polycarbonate

Operating Voltage 10 to 15 VDC

Indications Bi color Green/Red, Amber LED and audible tone

Temperature -30 to +65 Deg C

Humidity 5 -95%, relative (indoor models)

Cable Requirements Seven conductor 22 AWG shielded

Reader Distance Maximum 150 Mtrs. From the Panel

Standards FCC and CE

Size 5.25" x 2.75" x 1.375"

6. The card reader shall have the following reader configuration options:

A. Reader beeps and flashes green on a card read, LED normally red, single line
control of LED.

B. Reader flashes green on a card read, LED normally red, single line control of LED.

C. Reader beeps on a card read, LED normally red, single line control of LED.

D. Reader beeps and flashes green on a card read, LED normally off, red and green
LED's controlled individually.

E. Reader flashes green on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's
controlled individually.

MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 10 of 11

F. Reader beeps on a card read, LED normally off, red and green LED's controlled
individually.

G. Beeper and LED are controlled by host only, LED normally off, red and green LED
controlled individually.

6.0 BADGE/CARD PRINTER

1. Card/badge printer to direct graphic print the cards with necessary software,
camera, tripod and scanner shall be provided with the system including supplies
for printing 1000 cards. The card printer shall be with following minimum
specifications.

Print Method: Dye-Sublimation/Resin Thermal Transfer
Resolution: 300 dpi (11.8 dots/mm)
Colors: Up to 16.7 million
Print Ribbon: Full color with resin black, YMCKO
Print Speed: 8 seconds per card / 450 cards per hour
35 seconds per card / 102 cards per hour
Accepted Standard Card
Sizes:
CR-80 (3.375 x 2.125 / 85.6mm x 54mm)
CR-90 (3.63 x 2.37 / 92mm x 60mm)
Maximum Print Area: 3.37L x 2.14W / 85.5mmL x 54.5mmW
Maximum Card Width
Range:
2.1" to 2.63" / 53mm to 67mm
Maximum Card Length
Range:
3.25" to 3.625" / 82mm to 92mm
Maximum Card Thickness: .010" to .060" / .254mm to 1.5mm
Card Types: PVC or polyester cards with polished PVC finish.
Card Capacity: 100 cards (.030") or 300 cards (.010"); auto or manual
feed
Display: LCD display shows printer status and diagnostic error
prompts
Software Drivers: Windows 3.1x and Windows 95/98; Windows NT and
Macintosh
Interface: Standard 8-bit parallel (ECP compatible) or Macintosh
serial; network compatible
Operating Temperature: 65 to 80 F / 18 to 27 C
Humidity: 20-80% non-condensing
Dimensions: 8.4"H x 13.6"W x 12.7"D / 213mmH x 345mmW x
323mmD
Weight: 16.3 lbs. / 7.4kg
Agency Listings: Safety: UL 1950, CSA C2.2 and TV-GS (IEC-950)
Emissions: FCC Class B, CRC c1374, Class B and TV-
MONITORING SYSTEM
Page 11 of 11

EMC (IEC-801 -2, -3, -4; CISPR 22, Class B), CE
Supply Voltage: 100-240 VAC, 2A
Supply Frequency: 50 Hz/60 Hz
Options: * USB Interface Cable
* Ethernet Interface Adapter
7.0 MAGNETIC DOOR CONTACT

Magnetic door contacts shall be provided on all doors equipped with the access
control system and the doors indicated in the drawing and listed in the door hardware
schedule to monitor the door status. It shall be possible to arm and disarm the doors to
be monitored manually or using the time zones in the system. The door contacts shall
meet following minimum specifications:

Contact Type: SPST, Gold under plating and deactivated Rhodium outer
plating

Switch Cycles: 50 Million

Operation Gap: One Inch

Colors: White, Brown, Grey

Construction: Weatherproof, high impact ABS plastic

Rating: 0.1 Amp/100 VDC

Temperature: -25 Deg. C to 70 Deg. C

8.0 ELECTRIC LOCK, POWER TRANSFER & REMOTE RELEASE / REQUEST TO EXIT

The system shall be complete with electric locks, power transfer and remote release /
request to exit push buttons located as shown on drawings and as listed in the door
hardware schedule.

Electromagnetic door holders shall be provided as part of Fire Alarm System for Fire
doors as shown on drawings and as listed in the door hardware schedule.

Automatic sliding doors shall be provided as detailed in Architectural Specification.
Wherever required, kick switches shall be provided to operate sliding doors.

All doors provided with Access Control System and all automatic sliding doors shall be
interlocked with fire alarm system.

IP TV SYSTEM
Page 1 of 4

SECTION 23

IP TV SYSTEM
IP TV SYSTEM
Page 2 of 4

SECTION 23

IP TV SYSTEM

INDEX

IP TV SYSTEM
Page 3 of 4


1.1 General

Compliance with sections of Division I, General and documents referred to therein.

The contractor shall supply, install, test and commission a Internet Protocol Television
System for distribution of digital television channels coming from 3 satellites specified by
transport streaming through IP and packet switched network to all outlet points
indicated in the drawing. The primary system equipment and components shall be
installed by a specialist sub contractor and is to be approved by the Resident Engineer
in accordance with the specifications as listed in this document.

The IPTV system supplier / installer shall be a specialist and has such trained technicians
for engineering assistance, installation and maintenance of the equipment. All of the
equipment or components for the system installed shall be from the same manufacturer,
except for items not included in their manufacturing range. Items not included in the
range of manufacturer shall be proposed to and be separately approved by engineer.

The system shall be capable of providing television reception of all local, neighboring,
and international channels broadcasted and receivable in this area.

3. SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

The IPTV system is based on the principle that the IP streamers are DVB to IP gateways
designed to broadcast in multicast on IP network, the services (TV or Radio programs)
issued from digital satellite, terrestrial or cable reception, or from professional DVB
equipment.

The streamers shall be modular construction as to allow for easy upgrading and adding
of future channels and fully compatible with analog and digital transmission technology.

The streamers modules shall have two directionally coupled input ports that facilitate
simple connection of the incoming signal using the plug bridges. For power connection
each module has two DC banana sockets that allow to build the +12 Vdc cascade from
the power supply module. A third banana socket is available to connect the power for
the attached LNB.

The equipment shall be housed in a weatherproof, lockable cabinet, allowing for
sufficient ventilation, preferably being located in a climate-controlled environment.

A. IP Streaming Module

The specification of the IP streaming device module shall be as follows:-

Input : 1 DVB transport stream (MPTS)
Output : up to 8 simultaneous IP-encapsulated programs with individual multicast
address
Filtering of information contained in the MPEG-2 tables
UDP and RTP transmission protocols
Web interface for module configuration
SAP and SDP protocols to facilitate automatic program selection in the set-top box and
to provide program information to external servers
PID filtering
IP TV SYSTEM
Page 4 of 4

PSI/SI parsing
ECM and EMM transparent pass through
Regeneration or blockade of CAT, NIT, SDT, EIT and TDT tables
QoS marking configurable
TTL configurable

DVB-S to IP Streamer

Input
Section
(QPSK)
Frequency Range 950 - 2150 MHz
Input Level -65 -25 dBm
Input Symbol Rate 2 45 MS/s
Output
Section
(IP)
Standard IEEE 802.3 10/100 BaseT
Bit Rate up to 100 Mbps
Transmission Protocol UDP/RTP
No. of simultaneous
streams
up to 8
Multicast Yes

Connectors
Configuration RS 232 / DB-9
Ethernet Output RJ-45
General
Supply Voltage +12 Vdc
Operating
temperature
0 +45 C

Configuration and setting of the streamers shall be carried out through a web browser
running on a PC provided with Ethernet adapter.

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 1 of 10

SECTION 24

MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 2 of 10

INDEX

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 3 of 10


1.1 Description of Work

The contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and maintain during warranty period
the complete mobile radio system as specified herein for the hotel and serviced
apartment buildings.

The system shall be of the latest state of art technology in digital mobile radio system
and shall be based on DECT( Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication)
technology or equivalent. Scope of work shall include the supply, installation, testing,
and commissioning of the whole system including but not limited to the following:

a) 30 nos indoor 6 channel base stations
b) 15 nos. outdoor 6 channel base stations
c) PC based management system for the subscription of the mobile phones and
programming the features.
d) Interface to the Property Management System
e) PC based Text messaging system
f) 80 Mobile Handsets
g) All related control, communication and power cabling, accessories and
terminations.

No. of base stations mentioned above are only indicative. Actual no. of base stations
shall be decided by the contractor based on a detailed site survey with all the required
advanced equipment. Contractor shall conduct the site survey and provide the
required no. of base stations at strategic locations to obtain complete coverage of the
area to consultant approval.

The contractor shall negotiate the necessary application for frequency allocation with
Ministry of Communication and shall be responsible to pay all the necessary charges to
Ministry of Communication.

The system should defines a Common Interface (CI) for equipment (between the Fixed
network part and the portable part)

The system supports both the Public Access Protocol (PAP), which has some proprietary
aspects and the Generic Access Protocol (GAP), which secures compatibility of the
system equipment of different suppliers for basic speech call. The latter allows the users
freedom of choice for the portable terminal equipment.

System should have micro-cellular system, which means that the system makes use of a
network of radios with a low transmitter power (250 MW). A cordless extension must be
registered by the system before it can be used to make or receive calls. This registration
process is called subscription. Subscription to the system requires a Personal Identification
Number (PIN) allocated by the Communications manager. Once subscribed the
extension can be temporarily removed, or blacklisted if required.

The cordless extension monitors the quality of the radio link during a call. If the
interference on a certain carrier (frequency) and timeslot causes problems, it should
switch to another frequency at that same base station. This is called intra-cell hand over.
This hand over procedure requires that the connection can be supported on 2 channels
simultaneously, for a while, to allow a "seamless hand over". So, first, the handset selects
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 4 of 10

a new (interference free) channel and sets up a connection via that channel, while the
old channel is still in use. Secondly, the old channel is disconnected. The user will not
notice anything of the hand over. If the mobile user roams from one cell to another,
during the conversation, he will probably go out of range of the first radio and into the
range of the second. In that case, if the quality of the transmission requires it, the radio
link will switch over to the new radio. This is called inter-cell hand over, which will also be
seamless.

1.2 Continuous Dynamic Channel Selection

The system handset should continuously monitor its environment and autonomously
selects the best frequency, timeslot and base station. This selection and possible change
should be unnoticeable for the user, when moving through the system network and
during a call. This process is called Continuous Dynamic Channel Selection (CDCS) .Due
to this CDCS process cells may overlap and no frequency planning is required, as is the
case for many other types of cellular systems.

Speech communication between handsets should be encrypted (or scrambled)

If a cordless telephone set is lost or stolen it should be possible for the communications
manager to blacklist the set. This means that can no longer be used within the DECT
area.

1.3 Frequencies and Timeslots

System should pirate in a frequency range of 1880 - 1890 MHz. There are ten carriers
defined and in each carrier 12 full duplex (12 up link + 12 down link) time slots. This allows
120 full duplex channels in the air. Frequencies and time slots are re-used in the covered
area and dynamically selected, so the maximum number of available channels always
high enough even in high traffic density areas. Due to the maximum number of duplex
time slots, the maximum number of simultaneous connections per RFP should be 6 or 12.

1.4 Radio Base-Stations

With a radio base station a radio environment (cell) is created in which the portable
telephone can operate. The radio base station should provide the air interface between
the fixed network and the portables.

The RFP is the radio base station or the Transceiver for the radio signals. The following
should be made available:

Indoor RFP that can handle a maximum of 6 simultaneous calls (6 channel RFP).
Indoor RFP that can handle a maximum of 12 simultaneous calls (12 channel
RFP).
If required Directional Antennas should be used to cover the required range.

1.5 PP (Portable Part)

The Portable Part of the system handset should be delivered with the iS Mobile system
comply with the GAP (Generic Access Profile), ETS 300 175 agreements.

1.6 Base Station

The Base Station should supports the following features
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 5 of 10

a) Supports DECT GAP compatible handsets
b) 10/100 Mbits Ethernet interface
c) Full non-blind slot radio
d) Secure DECT encryption
e) Support of G.729ab for compression, silence suppression and comfort noise
insertion
f) Roaming and seamless handovers.
g) LRMS messaging (max. 160 characters)
h) CLIP and Name display
i) Overlap sending
j) Enquiry
k) DTMF and call progress tones
l) Message waiting indication
m) Downloadable software
n) Plug-and-play installation
o) Flexible assignment of channels

1.7 Environmental Conditions

ETS 300 019-1-3, temperature range:
Storage class 1.2 (25 C to +60 C)
Transport class 2.3 (40C to +70 C)
Operation class 3.1 (0 C to +60C)
With optional outdoor box:
Operation class 3.3 (20 C to +50C)
Relative humidity < 90 % (non condensing)

1.8 Safety

- EN60950-1:2001
- EN50385
- Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC)
- EN301489-1 and 6
- EN61000-3-2/3 (AC supply)
- DECT
- EN301406 V1.4.1: 2001-03
- EN300757 (Service class 2)

1.9 Reliability

- MTBF < 4600 FIT (Failure In Time)
- Technical lifetime > 7 years

1.10 Hand Sets

Type- I (10 Nos.)

Handsets carry a CE mark and conform to:
- EMC: EN301 489-1, EN 301 489-6
- EMF: EN50360
- Radio: EN301406
- Telecom: TBR10, TBR22
- Safety: EN60950-1
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 6 of 10

The graphic LCD (96 x 60 pixels) features a single icon (head) line, three text lines of 16
characters and a soft key line.

Light, slim-line, ergonomic design

Up to 20 hours calling time
200 hours stand-by time
Loudspeaker mode for hands-free operation (with indicator)
Built-in vibrator for silent alert
Illuminated display and keypad
Personal phone book (100 entries of
16 characters and 32 digits)
CLI (name & number) support
Pre-dial number preparation/correction
Caller log (last 30 calls answered, missed, rejected or filtered, including date/time
stamp)
20-number redial
Incoming call filter (10)
Quick call (9 numbers)
Alphanumeric messaging (LRMS)
Multiple subscriptions (10) with automatic/manual selection
Ringer melodies (30) with individual melodies for all alerts
Adjustable ringer volume (8 settings)
Adjustable earpiece, loudspeaker and headset volume (8 settings)
Multiple menu languages (12)
Recall/hold (PBX enquiry)
Call-reject option
SOS key
Microphone mute
Keypad lock
Silent charging
Auto answer
Automatic encryption for secure calls
Easy menu programming
Alarm (watch) function
Date & time display
Call-duration display
Date/time stamp on logged calls and received messages
Headset connection with hook switch in cable (standard 2.5 mm plug)
Standard rechargeable batteries (3x AAA 1.2V/800mAh NiMH)
Removable belt clip
Chargers

TYPE-II (20 Nos.)


- EMC: EN301 489-1, EN301 489-6
- EMF: EN50360
- Radio: EN301406
- Telecom: TBR10
- Safety: EN 60950-1

AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 7 of 10

The graphic LCD (96x33 pixels) features a single icon (head) line, one text line of 16
characters and a soft key line:
- Adjustable ringer volume (7 settings)
- Adjustable earpiece and loudspeaker volume (7 settings)
- Auto answer when lifting from charger
- Automatic encryption for secure calls
- Call-reject option
- Caller log (last 20 calls answered, missed or rejected)
- CLI (name & number) support
- Easy menu programming
- GAP/CAP compatible
- 200 hours stand-by time
- Illuminated display
- Keypad lock
- Last-number redial (10)
- Light, slim-line ergonomic design
- Loudspeaker mode for hands-free operation (with indication)
- Microphone mute
- Multiple menu languages (12)
- Multiple subscriptions (5) with automatic/manual selection
- On-hook number preparation with correction option
- Personal phone book (50 entries with 16 characters and 32 digits)
- Provides crystal clear voice quality and seamless handover
- Quick call (9 numbers)
- Recall/ hold (PBX enquiry)
- Removable belt clip
- Ringer melodies (10) with individual ringer melodies for all alerts
- Silent charging
- SOS key
- Standard rechargeable batteries (3x AAA 1.2V/800mAh NiMH)
- Up to 20 hours talk time

TYPE-III (70 Nos.)


- EMC: EN301 489-1, EN301 489-6
- EMF: EN50360
- Radio: EN301406
- Telecom: TBR10
- Safety: EN 60950-1

Dust and water proof to IP 54.

The graphic LCD (96x33 pixels) features a single icon (head) line, four text line of 16
characters:
- Adjustable ringer volume (8 settings)
- Adjustable earpiece and loudspeaker volume (8 settings)
- Auto answer when lifting from charger
- Automatic encryption for secure calls
- Call-reject option
- Caller log (last 30 calls answered, missed or rejected)
- CLI (name & number) support
- Easy menu programming
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 8 of 10

- GAP/CAP compatible
- 100 hours stand-by time
- Illuminated display
- Keypad lock
- Last-number redial (10)
- Robust design
- Loudspeaker mode for hands-free operation (with indication)
- Microphone mute
- Multiple menu languages (12)
- Multiple subscriptions (5) with automatic/manual selection
- On-hook number preparation with correction option
- Personal phone book (100 entries with 16 characters and 32 digits)
- Provides crystal clear voice quality and seamless handover
- Quick call (9 numbers)
- Recall/ hold (PBX enquiry)
- Removable belt clip
- Ringer melodies (10) with individual ringer melodies for all alerts
- Silent charging
- SOS key
- Standard rechargeable batteries (3x AAA 1.2V/800mAh NiMH)
- Up to 7 hours talk time
- Chargers

1.11 Text Messaging System

System should supports the following

DECT E2 Messages (up to 160 characters) supports up to 160 characters, the
DECT equipment and/or the handset may limit this to 128 or even 48 characters.

If the handset supports only 48 characters, the message can be chopped and
sent in parts to the handset.

Sending messages to the Digital extensions telephone of the PABX or DECT
extensions during ringing and in call connect status.

Message length can specified per device type. Also if messages are to long to
be displayed, they can be chopped into parts that can be displayed.

SMS messages to Cell phones.

The System should send SMS messages to cell phones. The interface to the Cell
Phone provider can be a modem or special box that behaves like a real cell
phone with SIM card.

This option is mainly used as alternative device. If a message to a DECT handset is
not acknowledged, the message can be forwarded to a cell phone.

E-mail messages.

E-mails can be sent via SMTP to any E-mail server. The E-mail contains the
message that needs to be sent.

Digital output to control relays or similar equipment.
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 9 of 10

The relay contacts can be use to control e.g. door-contacts, hooters in case of
an alarm or lamps. Contacts are specifically used as alternative device
(overflow) , in case a message is not confirmed.

ESPA 4.4.4 pager protocol. The System should send pager messages to paging
equipment using the ESPA 4.4.4 protocol.

The System should consist of separate modules. There are three main groups of
Modules:

- Core software Modules
- Input and Output Modules
- Security modules

1.12 Message Handling Functions

- Conditional messages
- Flexible call-cycle definition
- Free message input
- Group nesting
- Individual calendar function
- Manual messages from operator
- Manual messaging
- Message chopping (for very long messages)
- Message confirmation (LRMS, urgent)
- Message destinations based on working hours and holidays
- Message diversion
- Message overflow on non-receipt
- Message urgency levels: normal, urgent and very urgent.
- Messaging to groups
- Messaging to individuals
- Messaging via web access
- Outstanding alarm confirmation, by dialing the PBX (CLI or PIN)
- Pre-programmed messages
- Priority queuing
- Repeat message sending
- Script messages for emergency situations
- Timed messages
- Week calendar function

1.13 Alarm Sending Functions

- Connect external alarm systems as output
- Dynamic destination (depending on message length)
- GSM or WAN paging
- Location indication in alarm messages
- Message division over several display lines
- Message scroll on display
- Messages in outgoing e-mails
- Message queuing for SMS
- Protocol support (on request)
- Provider access
- Short messages linked in groups
AL TADAWI HOSPITAL
PART B - SECTION 24
MOBILE RADIO SYSTEM
Page 10 of 10

- SMS confirmation via CLID
- SMS confirmation via DTMF/PIN
- To external GSM phones
- To internal analogue and digital sets (user-to-user)
- To LRMS/DECT handsets
- To Messenger @ Net application from DECT LRMS handset
- To non-LRMS/DECT handsets (user-to-user)
- To third-party applications using ESPA 4.4.4

Messenger @ Net Alarm capture Functions

- Alarms generated by calling a predefined extension number.
- Alarms initiated based on incoming e-mails
- Alarms initiated based on incoming voice calls (CLID)
- Alarms set, reset and confirmed based on inbound calls
- Connections to contacts: physical contacts (NO, NC, pulse), voltage and
current sensor inputs, or digital
- E-mail confirmation of acceptance or rejection
- Play pre-recorded voice messages
- Reset alarms based on input from hardware contacts
- Set up a call to a device and play a wav file linked to a specific alarm
- Various protocols supported on a serial interface (refer to detailed
protocol list)
- Via ESPA 4.4.4 interface
- Via Ethernet TCP/IP
- Via serial interface
- Via SNMP

Electrical Specification

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Electrical Specification

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

VOLUME-5

S-ar putea să vă placă și